SMS Basic and Advanced Manual

SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Table Of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
System Requirements to Run the Software ....................................................................................................................... 1
Things You Should Know to Run the Software .................................................................................................................. 1
Getting Started ................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Registering Your Software ................................................................................................................................................. 4
How to Use the Electronic Help ......................................................................................................................................... 6
User Interface ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Menus................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Main Windows .................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Data Processing................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Processing Data ............................................................................................................................................................... 53
Syncing With SMS Mobile ................................................................................................................................................ 53
Data Management ............................................................................................................................................................... 55
Data Management............................................................................................................................................................ 55
Workspaces...................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Projects ............................................................................................................................................................................ 56
Mapping and Viewing Data .................................................................................................................................................. 59
Mapping Data ................................................................................................................................................................... 59
Map Backgrounds ............................................................................................................................................................ 59
Layering............................................................................................................................................................................ 60
Data Playback (ADVANCED)........................................................................................................................................... 60
3D Mapping and Plotting (ADVANCED) .......................................................................................................................... 60
Legends ............................................................................................................................................................................... 63
Legends............................................................................................................................................................................ 63
Creating and Editing Data.................................................................................................................................................... 65
Creating Data ................................................................................................................................................................... 65
Editing Data...................................................................................................................................................................... 68
Jobs and Tasks.................................................................................................................................................................... 71
About Jobs and Tasks...................................................................................................................................................... 71
Creating and Editing Jobs and Tasks .............................................................................................................................. 71
Exporting Jobs and Tasks ................................................................................................................................................ 71
Data Analysis and Modification............................................................................................................................................ 73
Data Modification and Creation ........................................................................................................................................ 73
Analysis Wizard (ADVANCED) ........................................................................................................................................ 74
Multi-Project Analysis (ADVANCED)................................................................................................................................ 76
Spatial Data Finder (ADVANCED) ................................................................................................................................... 76
Financial Tracking ............................................................................................................................................................ 77
Booklet Printing (ADVANCED)......................................................................................................................................... 77
Importing/Exporting Data and Setup Information................................................................................................................. 79
Importing Data.................................................................................................................................................................. 79
Exporting Data.................................................................................................................................................................. 80
Device Setup .................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Printing (Reports, Charts, Map Layouts, etc)....................................................................................................................... 85
Printing ............................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Data Backup, Transfer, and Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 87
iii
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Backing up and Restoring Data........................................................................................................................................ 87
Transfer Settings, Setup Files, Etc................................................................................................................................... 87
Database Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 89
How to ................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
How to read logged data files into the system. ................................................................................................................ 91
How to migrate your data from Precision Map 2000 or Instant Yield Map Software........................................................ 91
How to import Greenstar data. ......................................................................................................................................... 92
How to reprocess data. .................................................................................................................................................... 92
How to set your map projection........................................................................................................................................ 92
Using the Management Tree............................................................................................................................................ 93
Using the Preview Window............................................................................................................................................... 93
Using the Calendar View. (ADVANCED) ......................................................................................................................... 94
How to make a map ......................................................................................................................................................... 94
How to Add a Layer to a Map........................................................................................................................................... 95
How to display the 3D Terrain View. (ADVANCED)......................................................................................................... 95
Using the Layer Window .................................................................................................................................................. 96
How to adjust layer and attribute/property options. .......................................................................................................... 96
How to edit point data....................................................................................................................................................... 97
How to straighten a pass on a point dataset. ................................................................................................................... 97
How to edit a legend......................................................................................................................................................... 97
How to freeze a boundary. ............................................................................................................................................... 98
How to create a new attribute........................................................................................................................................... 98
How to create a new property. ......................................................................................................................................... 98
How to create/edit a custom Operation. (ADVANCED) ................................................................................................... 99
How to define Products .................................................................................................................................................... 99
How to add a property to a management item or dataset. ............................................................................................. 100
How to edit property data. .............................................................................................................................................. 101
How to enter Financial Tracking entries. ........................................................................................................................ 101
How to generate a Financial Tracking report. (ADVANCED) ......................................................................................... 102
How to create a 3D Plot. (ADVANCED) ......................................................................................................................... 103
How to create a boundary. ............................................................................................................................................. 103
How to edit a boundary. ................................................................................................................................................. 104
How to create a crop plan. ............................................................................................................................................. 104
How to edit a crop plan................................................................................................................................................... 105
How to create a generic dataset. ................................................................................................................................... 105
How to use the Average Data by Polygon Tool. (ADVANCED) ..................................................................................... 105
How to use the Vector Overlay Tool. (ADVANCED) ...................................................................................................... 106
How to edit generic data................................................................................................................................................. 106
How to create a guidance dataset.................................................................................................................................. 106
How to create navigation points. .................................................................................................................................... 107
How to edit navigation points. ........................................................................................................................................ 107
How to create a variable rate prescription...................................................................................................................... 107
How to edit a prescription dataset. ................................................................................................................................. 108
How to create a soil sampling dataset. .......................................................................................................................... 109
How to edit soil sampling data........................................................................................................................................ 110
How to add Buffer Regions to an object. (ADVANCED) ................................................................................................ 111
How to edit an image. (ADVANCED) ............................................................................................................................. 111
How to create spatial notes. ........................................................................................................................................... 111
How to edit spatial notes. ............................................................................................................................................... 112
iv
Table Of Contents
How to create associated data. ...................................................................................................................................... 112
How to edit an associated dataset. ................................................................................................................................ 112
How to create split planter data...................................................................................................................................... 113
How to add a simple analysis function(s). ...................................................................................................................... 113
How to edit a simple analysis function(s). ...................................................................................................................... 115
How to remove a simple analysis function(s). ................................................................................................................ 115
How to merge cotton pickings. ....................................................................................................................................... 116
How to straighten a pass on a point dataset. ................................................................................................................. 116
How to update a merged cotton dataset. ....................................................................................................................... 116
How to generate correlation results. (ADVANCED) ....................................................................................................... 116
How to generate a cluster analysis dataset. (ADVANCED) ........................................................................................... 117
How to generate comparison results. (ADVANCED) ..................................................................................................... 118
How to run a batch comparison analysis. (ADVANCED) ............................................................................................... 119
How to write an analysis equation. (ADVANCED) ......................................................................................................... 120
How to generate a Multi-Year averages dataset. (ADVANCED) ................................................................................... 122
How to generate a Profit/Loss dataset. (ADVANCED)................................................................................................... 123
How to generate an NDVI dataset. (ADVANCED) ......................................................................................................... 124
How to generate a terrain analysis dataset. (ADVANCED) ........................................................................................... 125
How to search for spatial data using the Spatial Data Finder. (ADVANCED)................................................................ 125
How to save a workspace. ............................................................................................................................................. 126
How to open a workspace. ............................................................................................................................................. 126
How to geo-reference an Image..................................................................................................................................... 126
How to download imagery from the internet................................................................................................................... 127
How to set a map background(s). .................................................................................................................................. 128
How to manually move a Farm....................................................................................................................................... 128
How to create a Job and Task(s). .................................................................................................................................. 128
How to export a Job. ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
How to manually move a Field. ...................................................................................................................................... 129
How to manually move other management items (Year, Load, etc.). ............................................................................ 130
How to spatially sort Fields into Farms........................................................................................................................... 130
How to spatially sort Loads/Regions into Fields............................................................................................................. 131
How to split and sort a load or region............................................................................................................................. 131
How to query a single layer. ........................................................................................................................................... 131
How to query multiple layers. ......................................................................................................................................... 132
How to export a bitmap or other image file type............................................................................................................. 132
How to import an image file............................................................................................................................................ 132
How to import an ESRI Shape, MapInfo Mid/Mif, DEM, or TIGER file........................................................................... 133
How to batch import data (i.e. ESRI Shape,and text files). (ADVANCED)..................................................................... 134
How to export an ESRI Shape file.................................................................................................................................. 135
How to import an ASCII text file. .................................................................................................................................... 135
How to import non-spatial data (i.e. Soil Lab Results). .................................................................................................. 135
How to export an ASCII text file. .................................................................................................................................... 136
How to import data using a template.............................................................................................................................. 136
How to export a TGT prescription file............................................................................................................................. 137
How to export an Insight/EDGE/INTEGRA IRX Prescription File .................................................................................. 137
How to export a Case IH or New Holland Voyager PRD Prescription file...................................................................... 138
How to export an Ag Leader Basic or Advanced format file........................................................................................... 138
How to print a map of the current layer. ......................................................................................................................... 138
How to print a map of all layers. ..................................................................................................................................... 139
v
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
How to print the current map. ......................................................................................................................................... 139
How to print a custom map............................................................................................................................................. 139
How to print the Summary Window Information. ............................................................................................................ 140
How to print the Map Window summary information...................................................................................................... 140
How to print the query results information...................................................................................................................... 140
How to print a report....................................................................................................................................................... 140
How to create a custom report. (ADVANCED)............................................................................................................... 141
How to print a chart. ....................................................................................................................................................... 142
How to create a custom chart. (ADVANCED) ................................................................................................................ 142
How to create a backup of your systems data. .............................................................................................................. 143
How to restore a data backup file................................................................................................................................... 143
How to export and import Transfer Information.............................................................................................................. 144
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................................. 145
Mapping Problems ......................................................................................................................................................... 145
Printing Problems ........................................................................................................................................................... 145
Restore Problems........................................................................................................................................................... 146
Tutorial Problems ........................................................................................................................................................... 146
Reference Information ....................................................................................................................................................... 147
Glossary of Terminology ................................................................................................................................................ 147
GPS Coordinate Conversions ........................................................................................................................................ 148
Ag Leader Basic and Advanced format.......................................................................................................................... 149
Export Data Formats ...................................................................................................................................................... 150
SDTS to DEM Converter (ADVANCED)......................................................................................................................... 151
Index .................................................................................................................................................................................. 153
vi
Introduction
Introduction
Ag Leader Technology is proud to offer SMS Basic/Advanced to you and thanks you for using our software. SMS
stands for Spatial Management System . The word "Spatial" means involving or relating to space. That’s exactly what
your Farm and Fields are. The space where you are involved (working) every day and the space that relates to all your
business decisions.
SMS is the easiest to use, yet most powerful precision farming software package available for use with your Ag Leader
equipment. It provides unique features to support all the Ag Leader precision farming equipment that you currently own
and also helps integrate information that you may have from other sources or equipment. Simply put, you have chosen
a software package that will continue to grow and adapt with your Ag Leader equipment, current and future, which no
other software package will be able to match.
System Requirements to Run the Software
The following table outlines the minimum system requirements that are advised you meet in order to run the software
properly.
Components
Minimum Requirements
Basic
Advanced
Pentium III or
Equivalent
Intel iCore 5 or 7
(2 GHz or higher)
Operating System
Windows 7(SP1 )/
Windows 8 (Not
RT) / Windows 10
Windows 7(SP1) /
Windows 8 (Not
RT) / Windows 10
Memory
1 GB RAM
6+ GB RAM
Application/Data
Storage Space
4 GB
12 GB+
Media Drive
CD-ROM or DVDROM
CD-R or CD-RW
Drive
Monitor size
17"
19"
1024x768 at 16-bit
color
1280 x1024 or
higher at 24/32 bit
color
Processor
Display Resolution
Things You Should Know to Run the Software
The software was developed with the Windows family of operating systems in mind. The software takes advantage of
many standard features of the Window’s operating systems that you might not be familiar with, but can greatly
enhance your productivity. The following is a list of Windows features that the software uses to provide increased
functionality and ease-of-use:
Keyboard

Shift key
When used along with the mouse, this allows the selection of multiple, continuous items at once. For example if
you select an item in the Management Tree then press and hold the Shift key down, then click on another item in
the Management Tree, all the selections between your first and last selections will be highlighted and selected.
Release the Shift key and the items will remain selected until the next selection with your mouse.

Ctrl Key
When used along with the mouse, this allows the selection of multiple non-consecutive items. For example if you
wanted to select two fields from the Management Tree to map at the same time but there were 4 fields in the list
between them, you would move your cursor over the first field, click the left mouse button to highlight and select
1
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
it. Then press and hold the Ctrl key and repeat the previous step to select the other field. Now release the Ctrl
key and both fields will remain selected until your next mouse click.

Arrow Keys
Allow the user to move through selected lists instead of using the mouse to make each selection. This can be
used to quickly move up and down in the Management Tree if a selection has already been made in the tree with
the mouse. It also allows the opening/closing of a branch in the tree. When a map is active in the software the
arrow keys also serve as panning tools.

" + " and " – " Keys on Numeric Keypad
Use these keys to zoom in and out on a map.

Home Key
Press this key to zoom and world and center the data in question.

F1 Key
Pressing this key brings up the help for the current selection.

Shortcut Key
Pressing this key will bring up the shortcut menu for the currently selected window. This key is commonly
located next to the right CTRL key. It can also be accessed by pressing SHIFT + F10.

Other Keyboard Shortcuts
Function Key(s) to Press to Activate Functions
Measure CTRL + M
Multi-Line Measure CTRL + L
Copy Selection CTRL + C
Paste
CTRL + V
Cut Selection CTRL + X
Undo CTRL + Z
Redo
CTRL + Y
Reset Cursor END
Delete Selection DELETE
Move Selection CTRL + E
Merge Selections CTRL + R
Snap to Start Point F2
Snap to Center F3
Snap to Midpoint F4
Snap to Endpoint F5
Snap to Closest F6
Snap to Vertex F7
Snap Off F8
Mouse

Clicking on an object or area
Point the cursor to or over the desired object or area and press the left mouse button
once and release.

Double clicking
Point the cursor to or over the desired object or area and quickly press and release
the left mouse button twice.

Dragging Objects
To drag an object such as a window, move your cursor over the object, click and hold down the left mouse button,
and then move the object to the desired location and release the left mouse button.

2
The Wheel
Introduction
If you have a Windows operating system that supports a mouse with a wheel, such as the MS Intellimouse, then
you can use the wheel for several functions, if your mouse has a wheel.

Scrolling – If a scroll bar is available in a window or dialog, move the cursor into that window or
dialog and roll the wheel forward or back and the scroll bar should move accordingly.

Zoom – Holding the Ctrl key down and rolling the wheel forward or back zooms the current map in
and out. This will even work on the Preview Window if the cursor is located over it.

Pan – Rolling the wheel forward or back, pans the current map up and down. Holding the Shift key
down and rolling the wheel forward and back will pan the current map left and right. This will also
work on the Preview Window if the cursor is located over it.
Adjusting and Docking Windows
All the windows that comprise the software’s main window can be adjusted to a different size, and some can be
undocked from there current location and moved around the screen as separate windows from the main window. To
adjust the size of a window move your cursor over the border of a window until you see a symbol with two parallel bars
and arrows on each side. When this icon appears click and hold the left mouse button and drag the edge to adjust the
size of the window. This is most useful for adjusting the size of the Layer window to view more of the legend, or the
opposite to see a larger map. To undock windows, and view them as separate floating windows, click on the gray
double bar above a window, click and hold the left mouse button down, and drag the window to a new location. The
window will now appear as a separate window from the main window. To re-dock the window with the main window,
click and hold the left mouse button down in the area at the top of the window and drag the window until your cursor
crosses one of the edges of the main window. The window will then automatically dock.
Hiding/Collapsing the Management View or Preview Windows
3
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
The Management Views window and the Preview window have options in the upper right hand corner of the windows
that allow you to hide/minimize the windows or collapse/expand the windows up/down to maximize/minimize their
display. Clicking on the "pushpin" icon so that it points sideways will cause the window to "hide". When it does this the
window will hide to the left edge of the screen and only be visible, as shown above, as a vertical tab(s). Move your
cursor over the tab and the window will expand out to its full size. When you move your cursor off the expanded
window it will automatically hide again. To un-hide a window then click the "pushpin" icon when the window is
expanded so that it points down and the window will remain visible.
The other option is to expand/collapse the windows vertically. To do this, click the "arrowhead" icon to the right of the
"pushpin" icon in one of the windows shown above and the window will either expand up/down vertically to fill the
window area available. This will cause the window above or below it to effectively hide. Click the icon again to return
the window to its default state.
Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus appear when you move your cursor over an object and click the right mouse button. Shortcut menus
provided access to specific feature for an object or a quicker method of getting to common functions. The Shortcut Key
or SHIFT + F10 can also provide access to the shortcut menu.
Getting Started
Installation
If you haven’t already done so, install the software on your computer. It is recommended that you install it on a storage
drive other than your main boot drive that contains your operating system, which is normally your C:\ drive. This is
especially true if your C drive is partitioned and is less than 10GB in size. The reason for this recommendation is due
to the amount of data that must be stored and is generated by your precision farming activities. If you have a smaller C
drive you could quickly fill the drive up or hinder performance of your computer by using to much of the boot drives
storage and operation memory. The software does allow you to install the actual program on a different drive than
where you data and database are stored. For example you can install the actual program on your C drive but have all
your data stored on a second drive.
Follow these steps to install the software on your computer from a CD:
1.
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. The CD menu should now automatically startup, if it does not, then click on the My Computer icon and open your CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive by doubleclicking on it.
2.
Follow the directions on the screen to install the software.
Migration
Each new release normally only supports migration and restoring backups from the previous version of the software.
Please see the current release notes for the details on what versions are supported for migration.
Registering Your Software
The software requires an unlock code to give you unlimited mapping and data creation capability. You have 21 days to
try the program before the program will require an unlock code provided by Ag Leader Technology . Once you have
4
Introduction
received your code you will be able to make unlimited maps and be entered into the Software Maintenance program
which guarantees that for the first year after you purchase the program, you will receive all minor and major software
releases automatically at no additional cost. After the first year you will be required to pay an annual maintenance fee
to maintain your status in the maintenance program.
To unlock the software follow these steps:
1.
Create a map and the registration wizard window will appear, or go to the Help menu and select Register.
2.
If you selected the Register option from the Help Menu, the License Manager dialog will now appear. This
dialog displays the software versions and options that you can potentially unlock. Select the item from the list
that you wish to unlock and click the Register button.
3.
Now the Registration Wizard Window will open. Select one of the Registration Options and then click the
Register button. If you have an internet connection, please use the Online option. If you do not have any
type of internet service then you will need to use the Phone option to register your software.
1.
4.
5.
If you selected the Online registration option please follow these steps.
1.
The first step is to log-in or create a registration account for the software. If you already have or
were provided a Username and Password, you can enter them and log-in, otherwise you need to
create a new registration account. To do this, select the Create New Account Button. You will now
be prompted to enter in your contact information from your address to your email address. You
must enter a valid email, otherwise you can not successfully register.
2.
Once you have created the new account and it has been accepted, your Username and
Password will automatically be filled in for you on the Login screen and you will be emailed your
Username and Password for your records. Now click the LOGIN button.
3.
Once you have registered and entered your login information, and clicked the LOGIN button, you
will now be prompted to enter your activation code. The activation code is attached to the outside
of your CD case.
If you selected the Phone registration option please follow these steps.
1.
The Phone Registration dialog should now be displayed.
2.
If you are located in North America (English Support Only) call 1-515-232-5363, select Option 1
(Technical Support), and then the option for Desktop Software . You will be required to provide the
Computer ID and Registration Code that are listed on the Phone Registration dialog. If you are an
International customer then please contact your local Service Provider and they will help register
you and get your unlock codes.
3.
A registration account will be manually created for you and you will be provided with a username
and password.
4.
As long as it can be verified that you have paid for the software or are currently enrolled in the
software maintenance program you will be provided with an unlock code that you can then enter
into the available entry on the Phone Registration dialog.
6.
The software should now indicate that the software has been unlocked and you now have full access to all
the functionality you paid for.
If you would like to run the software on more than one computer you can do so. You are allowed to unlock the software
on two computers, with the stipulation that you won't be running them at the same time for work purposes. For
5
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
example, you may have a laptop and desktop computer and would like both unlocked so that when you are in the field
or traveling that you can fully use the software. Your registration account automatically allows you to get 2 unlocks
automatically via the internet without contacting technical support.
See one of the topics below on registering your software:
License Manager
Registration Login
Create New Account
Enter Activation Code
How to Use the Electronic Help
The Electronic Help is organized to help you learn how to use t quickly and effortlessly. The following outlines the
different identifiers that you will encounter in this Help manual and what they mean:
"(ADVANCED)" - If you see this text next to a help topic title or an item in the help that means this feature/topic only
applies to the Advanced version of the software. Anything else without this text next to it applies to all versions of the
software. By default the software is sold as the BASIC version.
Text underlined in green indicates a link to another help page. Click on the text underlined in green to jump to another
help page.
Text underlined with a green dotted-line links to a popup. Click on the text underlined with a dotted green line to see a
popup.
Click on graphical icons to jump to another Help page or start a movie (w/o sound) Some images can be clicked on to link to another Help page. Move your cursor over these images, when indicated by
text below them, and then you see a "hand" icon appear click the left mouse button to go to the linked Help page.
6
User Interface
Menus
Main Menu Selections and Toolbar
The Main Menu Selections allow you to access the core features, settings, and help for the system.
Basic menu:
Advanced Menu:
Move the cursor over an area you would like more information about and if a hand icon appears click the left
mouse button to see more information.
Basic Toolbar:
Advanced Toolbar:
Move the cursor over an area you would like more information about and if a hand icon appears click the left
mouse button to see more information.
File Menu
Summary Window File Options
7
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Projects
Projects are normally used to separate data from different users or customers that you want kept in different databases
for security or data size reasons. Advanced users can create, edit, or delete an unlimited number of Projects. Basic
users can only create/edit/manage up to (5) Projects and are limited to a single Data Location where there data is
stored. Advanced users can define multiple Data Locations to store data, which can be on the same computer or on
individual servers spread out around the world.
New
Allows the creation of new views in the main window or datasets. You can create the following:
Map
3D Plot (ADVANCED)
Chart
General Report
Scouting Report
Financial Tracking Report
Crop Plan(s)
Operation Summary Dataset
Read File(s)...
Allows different types of files to be read into the software. Three options for reading in files are provided.
Read File(s) from a Supported Field Display or Monitor
Files from Ag Leader Technology, AGCO, Case IH, CLAAS, Flexi-Coil, John Deere, New Holland, RDS, and Trimble
can be read directly into the software. Options are provided for manually selecting files or automatically searching
folders or hard drives/memory cards.
Sync/Import Projects from SMS Mobile
Allows the user to sync or import a Mobile Project from Ag Leader Technology's SMS Mobile software. This
sync/import process can also update the Mobile project with newer information from your software, such as
updated management item names or edited data.
Import a File from a Generic Source
Allows the user to import generic data files of the following types:
3D Surface Files (ADVANCED)
Allows the import of 3D surface files such as DEM's, NED's, LIDAR, and SDTS Elevation models.
8
User Interface
Images
Allows the import of BMP, JPEG, JPEG2000, GIF, MrSID, PNG, WMF, TIFF, or GeoTIFF image
files. World files containing geo-referencing for the import image are also supported, if available,
and will be automatically loaded if they are present in the same location as the image file you are
importing.
Management Items Files (Product Lists)...
Allows the import of management items such as Products, Vehicles, and Field names. Generic
lists of items can be imported from ASCII text files or specific formats such as the Management
Setup File (.*MSF) or AgriDNA XML file.
MapInfo MID/MIF File
Allows the import of MapInfo files.
Non-Spatial File (Lab Results)...
Allows the import of ASCII text files that don't contain spatial (position) data that you need to
import and link to spatial data already in the system, i.e. import Soil Lab Results and link them to
a soil sampling points in the system.
Shape File
Allows the import of ESRI Shape files.
Text File
Allows the import of ASCII text files.
TIGER File
Allows the import of TIGER files.
Import a File Using a Saved Template
Allows the user to select an import template that was saved from a previous Spatial or Text file
import to use on a new import file of the same type.
Download Imagery from Internet...
Allows the automatic downloading and import of aerial images from the internet. You must have an internet connection
to use this feature and you should have either automatic, frozen, or set boundaries for fields in your system to get the
best possible images available.
NOTE: No warranty or guarantee of imagery quality or availability is made when using this feature.
Downloaded imagery is made available for the users own private use only and is not to be used for resale or
commercial purposes.
Download Soil Survey from Internet (US Only)...
Allows the automatic download and import of soil survey data from the USDA via the internet. You must have an internet
connection to use this feature and you must have either an automatic, frozen, or set field boundary for your fields in
order to download the soil survey information. The available data may vary from region to region but as much technical
detail as is available is downloaded for the soils that go with your fields.
NOTE: No warranty or guarantee of quality or availability is made when using this feature.
Export
Opens the export wizard dialog and allows the user to export data from the system using 3 possible methods:
Export to a Display Using Device Setup
Allows the export of files to supported field displays. This export option provides full setup for most
supported displays, not just individual files.
Export to a Display With a Single File
Allows the export of individual files (boundaries, VR prescriptions, etc) to a supported field display. This
export method has a smaller list of supported displays than Device Setup and many of the displays listed
for this option are NOT available in Device Setup.
IBY File
Allows the export of a boundary dataset as an IBY file for use in the Ag Leader Insight display.
BDY File
Allows the export of a boundary dataset as a BDY for use in the Ag Leader PF3000 or PF3000
Pro
PFN File
Allows the export of a navigation dataset as a PFN file for use in the Ag Leader PF3000 or
PF3000 Pro
TGT File
9
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Allows the export of a prescription dataset as a TGT prescription file for use in the Ag Leader
PF3000, PF3000 Pro, or Insight displays.
IRX File
Allows the export of a prescription dataset(s) as an IRX prescription file for use in the Ag Leader
Insight display. This format supports multiple product prescriptions.
PAT File
Allows the export of a guidance dataset as a PAT file for use in the Ag Leader Insight display with
the AutoPilot option enabled.
FALCON File
Allows the export of a prescription dataset as a TIF or TRF/INI prescription file(s) for use in an
AGCO/AGCHEM Falcon system.
Note: Your Falcon controller must be unlocked by AGCO to provide the ability
to spread from TIF maps.
ENS File
Allows the export of a prescription dataset as an ENS prescription file set for use in Case IH AFS
Concord and Cyclo systems.
PRD File
Allows the export of a prescription dataset as a PRD prescription file for use in the Case IH AFS
PT and New Holland SP series planters running firmware that supports the Voyager file format.
PRE File
Allows the export of a prescription dataset as a PRE prescription file for use in the Case IH ADX
or Flexi-Coil Flexcontrol systems.
ARM File
Allows the export of a prescription dataset as an ARM prescription file for use in Mid-Tech and
Tyler/Case IH AIM systems.
GLN File
Allows the export of a guidance dataset as a GLN file for use in Mid-Tech displays.
Trimble Files
Allows the export of datasets as guidance, boundary, or prescription files for Trimble displays and
mobile software.
EZ-Guide Plus Guidance File
Allows the export of a guidance dataset as a FLD file for use in an EZ-Guide Plus system from Ag
Leader, Case IH, New Holland, and Trimble. Requires v2.0 or higher firmware in the EZ-Guide
Plus and the latest version of the EZ-Toolbox program on your PC.
Remote Data Logger Files
Allows the export of a guidance dataset as a guidance file for use in the Remote Data Logger
(RDL) from Case IH, New Holland, and Trimble.
Export Using a Generic File Format
Allows the export of data in generic formats.
Image Files
Allows the export of bitmap, JPEG, GIF, PNG, TIFF, or GeoTIFF image files.
Shape Files
Allows the export of ESRI Shape files.
KML (Keyhole Markup Language) File
Allows the export of Google KML files that can be used in Google Earth or other GIS applications.
Text Files
Allows the export of ASCII text files.
Ag Leader Basic File
Allows the export of an Ag Leader Basic comma delimited text file.
Ag Leader Advanced File
Allows the export of an Ag Leader Advanced comma delimited text file.
Print Setup
10
User Interface
Standard Window’s printer selection and setup options.
Print Preview
Provides a print preview of the information that is currently displayed in the Summary Window.
Print
Prints the information that is currently being displayed in the Summary Window.
Print Report
Allows the user to print a Grower, Farm, or Field Summary report.
HTML Report
Allows the user to create the same type of reports as above but as an HTML page instead of printing to a printer.
Open Workspace
Allows the user to select a saved workspace to open.
Save Workspace
Allows the user to save the current map(s) and layer(s) that are open as a workspace that can be reopened at any time
to return to the same map(s) and layer(s) that were open when the workspace was saved.
Save As Workspace
Allows the user to save the current workspace as a different name.
Recent Workspace
Allows the user to see a list of recent workspaces that have been used and select one to open.
Exit
Closes the application.
Map Window File Options
The following menu items differ from those described above when the a Map Window is active:
New
11
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Allows the user to create one of the following dataset types:
Boundary Layer
Allows the user to create a new field boundary dataset.
Field Crop Plan Layer
Allows the user to create a new crop plan dataset for a single field. This option is only available if you have
a field boundary open in the current map and the crop plan will be added for that field only.
Generic Layer
Allows the user to create a new generic dataset that can contain point, line, or polygon data. The user can
also define and add new attributes for a generic dataset.
Guidance Layer
Allows the user to create a new guidance dataset to be exported to an assisted or automated steering system
or to be used for field work planning.
Navigation Layer
Allows the user to create a new navigation point dataset.
Plot Prescription Layer (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to create a new plot prescription dataset that can be used for research/test plot design.
Prescription Layer
Allows the user to create a new prescription dataset.
Soil Sampling Layer
Allows the user to create a soil sampling dataset using a gridding wizard. Soil sampling lab results can then
be imported and tied to the points.
Scouting Layer
Allows the user to create a scouting dataset(s) by drawing regions or gridding an area. Scouting data specific
to different pests can also be created and saved as their own scouting operations based on pest type.
Tile Plan Layer (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to create a new tile plan dataset.
Map
Allows the creation of a new map based on your selection(s) in the Management/Monitor Tree , Calendar
View, or Job/Task Tree.
Map Layer
Allows the creation of a new layer in the current map, based on your selection(s) in the Management/Monitor
Tree , Calendar View, or Job/Task Tree.
Close Map
Closes the Map that is currently active.
Print Map
The following options are available for printing when a Map window is active:
Current Layer
Prints a map of only the current layer.
All Layers
Prints a map printout for each layer that is open on individual pages.
Current Map
Prints a map of all open layers on one page and then each of the available layers information printed on
the following pages.
Custom Layout
Allows the user to design a completely custom printout that can include such items as bitmaps and text
descriptions.
Print Map Summary
Prints a map summary report for the layers currently open in the active map.
Print Query Results
Prints a report of all the queries that have been performed in the active map.
Analysis Results Window File Options (ADVANCED)
12
User Interface
The following menu items differ from those described above when the an Analysis Results Window is
active:
Close Analysis Results
Closes the Analysis Results document window that is currently active.
Print All...
Prints all the results currently displayed in the analysis results document.
Save All as HTML...
Saves all the results currently displayed in the analysis results document as a single HTML file with links to each
analysis result.
Reset Document Settings...
Select this option to clear any saved analysis document settings you have set back to the original defaults.
Save All Document Settings...
Select this option to save all the settings you have made for the current analysis result and analysis function that was
run to generate them. When you rerun the same analysis function, these saved settings will be loaded to automatically
format your results the same way as when you saved. If you change the formatting or content of the results though, the
settings will automatically return to the default settings for your current results only.
Edit Menu
Summary Window Edit Options
13
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
General Summary Design
Allows the user to change what attributes and/or properties that are displayed in the General Summary window for the
current operation selection in the management tree.
Job/Task Summary Design
Allows the user to change what attributes are displayed in the Job or Task summaries. The Job summary can only be
edited when the Job node is selected in the Job/Task Tree. The attributes that can be selected for the Job summary
are limited to ones that are generic across different modes, like Fuel Used. The Task summary can only be edited
when a selection at the Operational Pair level down to Product is made. At the Operational Instance and below, the
normal summary will be displayed and if you wish to change it contents then you must make these changes on similar
data in the Management Tree.
Show Summary Value Source
Check this option to display symbols in the summary grid cells to the right of the values and units that identifies the
source of the displayed data. The following data sources are available for display along with their symbols:
Monitor Summary -
‡
Spatial Data Records Manual Entries Mixed Types -
†
«
*
Calendar Summary Grouping (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to adjust the grouping of data that is displayed for the current calendar view selection in the General
Summary window.
Zoom In
Select this option to zoom the current document view (i.e. the summary or a report) in, thus enlarging it.
Zoom Out
Select this option to zoom the current document view (i.e. the summary or a report) out, thus reducing its size.
Reset Zoom
Select this option to rest the zoom level to the system default for the current document view.
Map Window Edit Options
14
User Interface
Map Summary Design
Allows the user to change what attributes and/or properties that are displayed in the Map Summary window for the
current layer and operation in the active map.
Layer
Allows the user to edit the data in the current dataset layer and active map, if editable.
Legends
Allows the user to edit the legend for the current layer in the active map.
Notes
Layer Notes
Allows the user to add a spatial note(s) to the current dataset layer. These notes are tied to the specific
dataset they are added to and can only be viewed/edited when the same dataset is mapped.
Landmark Notes
Allows the user to add a landmark note(s) that will be displayed whenever spatial data is mapped. These
landmark notes allow the marking and notation of permanent landscape features such as wells, pump heads,
builds, etc.
Freeze Layer
Allows the user to freeze the current layer. By freezing a layer you can make adjustments to the dataset in the
management tree for example and create a new layer or map which you can compare to the original dataset layer that
you froze. If you had not frozen the layer then it would have been updated with any changes that you had made to the
original dataset. The frozen dataset will only be accessible while you have the current map that contains it open. Once
the map is closed or the layer is removed you can not reopen the frozen layer.
Layer Options
Allows the user to edit the layer, sub-layer, and attribute/property options for the current layer in the active map.
Map Options
Allows the user to edit the map options for the active map.
View Menu
Preview Window
15
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Allows the user to turn the Preview Window on or off. This allows for more viewing space.
Toolbar
Allows the user to turn the Main Toolbar on or off.
Status Bar
Allows the user to turn the Status Bar on or off.
Monitor Tree
Allows the user to hide the Monitor Tree.
Job Tree
Allows the user to hide the Job Tree.
Calendar View (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to hide the Calendar View
Financial Tracking Tree (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to hide the Financial Tracking Tree.
Map Menu
Close Map
Closes the currently active map and its layers.
Close All Maps
Closes all open maps and their layers.
Create Map for Selection
Creates a new map and layer for the current selection in the Management Tree.
Add Selection to Map
Adds a new layer to the active map for the current selection in the Management Tree
Reset Cursor
Resets the toolbar selections so that none are selected. This is useful if you want to cancel a selected function on the
toolbar.
General Tools
Zoom Out
16
User Interface
Click this button to scale the map window out once.
Zoom In
Click this button to scale the map window in once.
Zoom to Box
Click this button to zoom to a box area defined by the user.
Specialty Zooms
Zoom World
Click this button to zoom to the extent of all data currently on the map.
Zoom Previous
Click this button to zoom to the last zoom extent.
Zoom Selection
Click this button to zoom to the current layer selection.
Pan
Allows the user to drag the current contents of the map with the mouse in any direction.
Line Measure
Tape measure feature that allows the user to select a start and endpoint for a line and see the distance between the
points.
Multi-Line Measure
Tape measure feature that allows the drawing of multiple, connected line segments and see a running total of overall
distance from the start of the first segment to the endpoint of the last one.
Label Tools
Move Label
When User-Defined is selected on the Label Placement tab when editing Layer Options, this option will
become active. When selected it allows the user to drag labels to any location on a map. To use click on
an object on the active layer that you want to move a label for and hold the mouse button down. The
cursor will jump to the label location. Keep the mouse button held down and move the label to the desired
location and then release the mouse button.
Label Settings
Allows the user to set various parameters for the display of labels for each object in a layer when UserDefined has been selected as the Label Placement type. Click on an object in the active layer to edit its
label properties.
Select Type
Select Objects
When this selection type is selected, entire objects are selected when using one of the selection tools. For
example if Select Polygon is selected and you draw a selection that crosses the edge of a polygon, the whole
polygon will be selected not just the intersected area.
Select Intersections
When this selection type is selected, only the intersected area of a n object is selected. For example if the
Select Polygon tool is selected and a region is drawn across a quarter of a line segment, then only that length
of the line that fell in the selection area will be selected.
Select Tools
Select Point
Allows the user to select an individual spatial point.
Select Rectangle
Allows the user to select a region with a box.
Select Polygon
Allows the user to select a region with a polygon.
Select Circle
Allows the user to select a region with a circle.
Select Ellipse
Allows the user to select a region with an ellipse.
Select Pass
Allows the user to select a pass. Only valid for point or smart rectangle map types.
17
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Select by Legend Range
Allows the user to select a spatial object (point, line, polygon, cell) and all other spatial objects with the
same legend value will also be selected.
Select Via Filter
Allows the user to select a region using data filters that the user defines. Data filters can be based on
spatial statistics, attributes, and properties and in combinations.
Invert Selection
Allows the user to invert the current selection on the map, selecting all other items on the current layer
other than the ones that are currently selected.
Query Tools
Query Current Layer
Activates the query feature for the current layer.
Query through Current Layer
Activates a query that cuts through all layers below the current layer, using the selected area as a "cookie
cutter".
Query Multiple Layers
Activates the query feature for all layers that have been selected to be included in the multi-layer query.
Select Query Layers
Allows selection of all currently open layers in a map to be used in the multi-layer query.
Clear Query Results
Clears all the query results from the Properties Window.
Rotate Map (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to rotate the 3D view about the X, Y, and Z axis.
Hide/Show 3D View (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to toggle between displaying the current map in 2D or 3D view.
Reset Map Rotation (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to reset the orientation and zoom level of the current 3D view to the default orientation.
Dataset Playback (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to start the Dataset Playback Viewer which maps the data in real-time based on the order, time-wise,
that the data was logged.
Set Background
Allows the user to select a background(s) to be viewed on the active map.
Organize Layers
Allows the user to reorder or delete layers in the active map.
Analysis Menu (ADVANCED)
Analysis Wizard...
Select this function to run the available analysis functions such as Comparison Analysis, Equation Based Analysis,
Multi-Year Averages, etc. Analysis functions can be run on a single field, multiple fields, or across projects depending
on their type.
Spatial Data Finder...
18
User Interface
Select this function to build and/or run a dataset filter based on Management Items and/or Properties and then
generate a new map or add a new layer(s) to an existing map based on the results. For example, you can run a filter to
create a map of all the Grain Harvest datasets for a certain product such as all your corn harvest data.
Financial Tracking Entries
Select this function to enter detailed production financial values such as income, expenses, expense/income shares,
etc.
Financial Tracking Report
Select this option to generate a non-spatial profit/loss report that represents all the financial entries that you have
made.
Booklet Printing...
Select this option to create, select, or edit a booklet design. Booklets allow you to build an output that can contain a
title page, boundary maps, dataset print layouts, reports, charts, analysis results (single and multi-project), and a table
of contents. The booklet is generated dynamically each time you run it.
Tools Menu
File Viewer
Utility that allows the user to view general information for files archived in the system and to reprocess files that may
not have been properly entered into the management system.
Job Viewer
Opens the Job Viewer which allows the addition, editing, or deletion of Jobs and their associated Tasks from the
system. This viewer can also be reached using the Job Viewer button on the main toolbar.
Spatial Sorter
Utility that sorts spatial information based on its location relative to a set boundary area. There are two options for
sorting spatially:
Sort Fields into Farms
Uses a defined boundary area for a farm to sort fields with GPS into the appropriate farms.
Sort Loads into Fields
Uses a defined boundary area for a field to sort loads with GPS into the appropriate fields.
Task Sorter
Utility that sorts datasets into Tasks and/or creates new Tasks if no matches are found based on dataset sorting
templates that have been defined by the user. It then sorts the Tasks into Jobs.
Attribute Editor
19
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Allows the user to edit and create attributes that can be used in the system. Only a few settings can be changed for
system default attributes, such as display units.
Property Editor
Allows the user to edit and create user-defined properties that can be used in the system. System default properties
are not editable.
Management List Editor
Allows the user to select a Management Item and add new, edit, or delete items from the list of values. This editor can
be used before you read or import data into the system. It also allows you to define Resource Tracking Items such a
Operator, Vehicle, etc before reading your data into the system and allowing for easier and quicker linking of data to
Resource Tracking items when reading data into the system.
Merge Cotton Data
Allows users with cotton data to merge multiple pickings into a new, combined picks dataset. The user is required to
specify pickings (Operational Instances) to be merged. The resulting dataset is gridded, which is required to properly
total the pickings that cover the same spatial area in the same harvest season.
Device Setup Utility
Allows the user to create setup configurations containing Field names that can be exported to monitor systems from
Case IH, New Holland, and Ag Leader.
Batch Command Utility
Allows the user to apply various functions, such as the addition of properties to a group of datasets, in a batch
operation.
Calibration File Utility
Allows the user to edit or create calibration file groupings, called epochs. Epochs cover a period of time, by default a
calendar year. If need the calibration file for a epoch can be changed or a new epoch can be created to divide a year in
to two calibration groups, each with a different calibration file. This feature should not be used without first consulting
with a Technical Support representative.
General Options
Provides access to general operational settings for the entire system.
Services Menu
Backup/Restore Project(s)…
Allows the user to select from the following options related to backing up and restoring projects.
Backup Project Data Now
Allows the user to generate a compressed backup of a Project(s) and the data contained in it.
Schedule a Backup for Your Project Data (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to set a day and time to regularly perform an automatic backup of a Project(s) and the data
contained in it.
Restore Project Data
Allows the user to restore a compressed backup of a Project(s) and the data contained in it.
20
User Interface
Reprocess Files
Allows the user to reprocess data archived in the system to correct processing
mistakes or reenter data into the management system that may have been deleted.
Compact Files
Utility that compacts the database to remove unused entries and optimize the database’s performance.
Remove Unused Attributes/Properties
Utility that checks the system for attributes and properties that are not linked to any datasets and then allows the
deletion of these attributes/properties.
Background Layer Utility
Allows the user to manage the archived background images that have been imported or saved. This includes editing
names for backgrounds, deleting them, or just viewing stats for the background files.
Legend Utilities
Allows the user to import compatible legend files from a source outside the system and export legend files to an
outside location. Also allows the user to reset the current default legend settings to the factory defaults.
Map Settings Utility
Allows the user to reset the Layer, Sub-layer, and Attribute/Property settings for a selected operation(s), back to the
system default settings.
3D Plot Settings Utility (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to reset 3D Plot settings that have been saved.
Vault Utility
Allows the user to delete unwanted copies of import files that are stored in the data vault on your computer. These files
can take up large amounts of hard drive space and may not be need to be kept on your computer. The imported data
from these files will remain in your system either as datasets in your management tree or as backgrounds until you
delete them.
Transfer Utilities
Allows the user to Import/Export system settings and setup files for use in another system or other projects in your
system.
Note: Transfer is only supported between systems that are running the same version of the software.
Import Setting and Files...
Allows the import of a transfer file. You can also selectively chose from the contents of Transfer file to only
import the setting and setup files that you want.
Export Settings and Files...
Allows the export of a transfer file containing selected settings and setup files.
Open Transfer File...
Allows the user to open an existing transfer file to view it contents and make changes if needed.
Window Menu
New Horizontal or Vertical Tab Groups
Organizes one or more tabs into horizontal or vertical groups. This allows you view and manage multiple windows at
once, such as being able to view multiple maps in their own windows at once or a summary and a map at the same
time.
Close All Maps
Closes all the windows/tabs that are map based that are currently open in the program.
21
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Close All Windows
Closes all the window and documents that are currently open in the program.
Active Windows List
Lists the windows that are currently open and which one is active.
Help Menu
Help Topics
Opens the Table of Content for Help.
Help Index
Opens the Index for Help.
Online Tutorials…
Opens the SMS Tutorial located on the SMS CD. The tutorial contains step by step descriptions and video for some of
the more important functions in SMS.
Register…
Allows the user to register their copy of the software. Registration is handled via the internet by default. If you don't
have an internet connection then you can register by telephone.
Check for Updates...
If you have an internet connection this tool will check to see if you have the latest release of the desktop software, and
if you don't, it will provide the option to download and install the latest update to your software for you assuming you
can upgrade from your current version to the latest version.
Ag Leader Technology on the Web
Provides the user with links to web sites on the Internet. The following links are currently provided:
SMS Home Page
Provides the user with a link to the main page for SMS on the Ag Leader Technology web site.
SMS Links
Provides the user with a link to a page on the Ag Leader Technology web site that contains regularly
updated links to spatial data sources on the Internet that can be used in SMS Basic.
Ag Leader Technology Home Page
Provides a link to the main page of the Ag Leader Technology web site.
About ...
Version and copyright information as well as a tool to check the system information for troubleshooting.
Main Windows
General Layout
The layout of the main window is intended to help organize the large amounts of information that you will be storing,
viewing, creating, editing, and analyzing. It’s also intended to reduce the learning curve associated with some other
precision farming software packages by presenting a consistent and intuitive interface.
22
User Interface
Move the cursor over an area you would like more information about and if a hand icon appears click the left
mouse button to see more information.
Management Views
About the Management Tree
The Management Tree allows you to select, manage, and view the data that is stored in the management system. It
provides a visual interaction with your data when deciding what data that you would like to work with since your
selection(s) is tied to what is displayed in the Preview Window. There are two tree options available, the Main Tree and
the Monitor Tree. By default when the Management Tree is discussed, the Main Tree is what is normally being
referenced. The Main Management Tree displays and manages data in its logical form and displays information for all
types of data that have been archived, created, or imported. The Monitor Tree adds a different dimension to the data
management and displays only the data that was logged by a Case IH, New Holland, or Ag Leader monitor and
displays the management items as they were logged in the monitor. We call this a physical tree, which means it is
directly linked to what was logged. You can view and map data based on which monitor it can from and also see what
field numbers data was logged to and the names that were used. No editing or management options are available
when in the Monitor Tree.
How to Information and Other Links:
Using the Management Tree
Data Management
23
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Management Tree Toolbar
Collapse
Click this button to collapse the entire management tree, closing all the branches that are currently open to
the Grower Level.
Collapse Item
Click this button to collapse the management tree up to the currently selected level in the tree.
Expand Item
Click this button to expand the management tree below the currently selected level, opening all branches
below the current selection.
Show Management Tree Menu
Click this button to open the Management Tree Menu. This menu can also be opened by right clicking your
mouse in the management tree window.
Enable/Disable Management Tree Filter
Click this button to enable or disable the Management Tree filter. Once a filter is set you can use this
button to toggle the filter on and off without having to reset or clear your filter manually.
Edit Management Tree Filter
24
User Interface
Click this button to open a Data Filter dialog that allows you to select the management items and/or date
ranges for data that you would like to be displayed in the Management Tree. For example you can select a
Year filter to only show data from the current year in the Management Tree.
Edit Item
Click this button to view and/or edit the settings or properties for a selected item in the management tree.
Edit Resource Tracking
Click this button to assign or edit resources that can be assigned to a dataset, such as an Operator,
Vehicle, Implement, and Containers.
Edit Pest
Click this button to assign or edit a Pest that can be assigned to a dataset. A Pest can be assigned to any
dataset and not just Scouting datasets.
Edit Expense/Income
Click this button to enter/edit simple expense/income values for things like product purchases, commodity
sales, or application expenses. This option is ONLY available at the Product, Operational Instance, and
Dataset levels in the tree.
The Management Tree is organized in the following structure:
Level
Grower
Farm
Field
Example
Jim Farmer
Jim’s Farm
North 31.6
Year
2001
Operation Type
Spraying
Crop/Product
Roundup
Operational Instance
First Spraying
Load or Region
L1
The Monitor Tree is organized in the following structure:
Level
Monitor SN
Year
Example
920305
2001
Field
North 31.6
Operation Type
Spraying
Crop/Product
Roundup
Load or Region
L1
Operational Instance is an item in the Management Tree that may not be familiar to you. Operational Instance provides
a means for handling multiple field operations on the same field, same year, and same crop/product. This is useful for
cotton growers who pick their cotton fields twice, within the same harvest season. It is also useful when you have to
spray a field twice with the same chemical in the same season.
To assist in the handling of large amounts of data, not all of which may have GPS, the Management Tree displays data
with GPS in bold font and data without GPS in a non-bolded font. This allows for quicker selection of data that actually
contains data that can be mapped or allows you to close the preview window and make selections to map from the
tree based on their bolding.
Management Tree Menu
To access the options menu for the Management Tree click the right mouse button with an item selected in the tree.
Advanced Menu:
25
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Edit Item
Allows the user to view and/or edit the settings or properties for a selected item in the management tree.
Reassign Resource Tracking
Allows the user to assign or edit resources that can be assigned to a dataset, such as an Operator, Vehicle,
Implement, and Containers.
Reassign Pest...
Allows the user to assign or edit a Pest that can be assigned to a dataset. A Pest can be assigned to any dataset and
not just Scouting datasets.
Edit Expense/Income
26
User Interface
Allows the user to enter/edit simple expense/income values for things like product purchases, commodity sales, or
application expenses. This option is ONLY available at the Product, Operational Instance, and Dataset levels in the
tree.
Enter Manual Summary Values
Allows the user to enter manual summary values at the Operational Instance level. Entered values will be distributed to
all loads/regions tied to the Operational Instance you have selected. You can still edit individual load/region summaries
via Edit Item for a selected load, but this option allows you enter in totals for a set of loads/regions and let the software
properly distribute the total to each load/region for you.
Alter List
Displays a list of all the logical items in the system for the selected item type. You can create, edit, or remove logical
items from this dialog, even if they are not being used currently.
Delete Branch
Deletes the selected item and everything below it in the Management Tree. This does not remove archived data from
the system, only the Management Tree information. Deleted items still remain in the system, to completely remove
them use the Alter List… selection described above.
Move Branch
Allows the user to manually change the management settings for a selected item in the Management Tree.
Edit Associated Data
Allows the user to view, edit, or add an Associate dataset, such as a Scale Ticket or Note.
Reassign Associated Data
Allows the user to edit the linkage of an Associated dataset to a management item(s) or remove it from the system
completely.
Spatial Sorter
Sorts spatial information based on its location relative to a set boundary area. Using this tool from the management
tree will only apply the sort to data that is below the current management level selection. Thus you can sort a selected
Grower or Farm only versus the Spatial Sort option located under the Tools menu which will sort all data in the system.
There are two options for sorting spatially:
Sort Fields into Farms
Uses a defined boundary area for a farm to sort fields with GPS into the appropriate farms.
Sort Loads into Fields
Uses a defined boundary area for a field to sort loads with GPS into the appropriate fields.
Merge Fields
Allows the merging of two logical fields into one. This option properly alters the data management for the merged fields
so that any changes or new data that is read in will automatically apply to the merged location.
Split Load /Region
Allows the user to split and sort a selected load/region into the appropriate spatial location even though it may have
been logged improperly. Once a load/region is split, it can will not be updated with new data or recalibrated when
adjusted data files are read in. This option should only be used once all related data has been read into the system
and you are ready to place the data in the proper spatial location.
Create As-Applied Data (Split Planter or Multi-Product)
Allows the user to create split planter or as-applied data from data that was not logged as such but was actually
planted with a split planter configuration or cases where one product was logged but in reality multiple products were
actually applied from different application operations. This option can only be applied to Site Verification or Application
operation types and is only available when a dataset of this type is selected in the tree. By selecting the Operational
Instance level in the tree, you can create new data for all the loads/regions listed below the instance or by selecting
individual loads/regions. There is also a batch function that allows you to create new as-applied data in bulk. Beyond
the ability to create split planter data a common use may be for data that was logged as Site Verification in the field but
you would document that a multi-product and multi-operation event occurred such as planting and fertilizing at the
same time. This tool allows you to easily generate Planting and Fertilizing as-applied data from the Site Verification
data that was logged.
Create Installed Tile Data
Allows the user to create an Installed Tile dataset from an existing Tile Plan dataset. No settings are required. This is
useful when a plan was made but the installed data wasn't collected or was lost. The Installed Tile dataste can then be
exported back out to the display as a reference layer.
Trace Boundary
Allows the user to generate a new boundary that exactly traces the swath edges of a selected dataset(s) in the
management tree. This option is not the default for the system because it does not allow for automatic
building/updating of boundaries when new data is read in. It is a manual process and requires data to be specifically
27
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
selected to trace. This function can also be run in batch via the Batch Command Utility. Please also note that Trace
Boundary is a slower process than either Regenerate Boundary or Freeze Boundary because of the detail at which it
traces your selected data.
Regenerate Boundary
Regenerates the automatic boundary area based on the selected dataset in the Management Tree. This will undo the
Freeze Boundary… selection.
Freeze Boundary
Generates a vector boundary area for the selected automatic boundary area that the system generates. The vector
boundary area is required to use the Spatial Sorter.
Set as Field Boundary
Allows the user to set a manually created or imported boundary or dataset as the Field boundary that is displayed.
Regenerate 3D Grid (ADVANCED)
Regenerates the automatic 3D grid surface that is used to display a 3D terrain map of your data. By default the
software uses all the data read into the system to build the 3D grid surface but if errors are contained in some data that
is read in it may be necessary to pick only the data that contains good elevation data and use it to regenerate the
surface.
Set 3D Grid (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to select an imported dataset that contains elevation, swath, and distance data in it to use as the 3D
grid surface required for 3D mapping in place of the automatic 3D grid surface that the software generates. DEM
(Digital Elevation Model)files are the most common file type that could be imported for this purpose, but any of the
supported import files could be used as long as they contain an Elevation, Swath Width, and Distance Attribute.
Add Simple Analysis
Allows the user to apply a simple analysis function to a dataset. Examples are Scale, Filter, and Normalize. Once a
simple analysis function is applied to a dataset, it will be displayed in the management tree with a summation icon next
to it which indicates that a simple analysis function has been applied to the dataset, thus modifying it from its original
state when it was read into the system.
Reprocess Analysis
Allows the removal, editing, or addition of a simple analysis function for a selected dataset(s). Once all functions have
been removed from a dataset, the raw values will again be displayed and accessible.
Update Analysis Dataset
Allows the updating of the data that was input into a full analysis function, such as Merge Cotton Data. If new data has
been read into the system that should be have been or needs to be applied to your analysis result, then selecting this
function will load the latest data available into the analysis function, re-run it automatically, and re-save the new result
dataset over the old data. This saves you the steps of having to manually delete the current analysis results from the
management tree and then re-run the analysis function from scratch.
Reprocess Data
Allows the user to reprocess a selected dataset in the Management Tree. Depending on the dataset type, you will be
given options that can be changed or set to effect how the dataset is processed such as data filters and GPS
corrections.
Copy Dataset to Background List
Allows the user to copy a dataset from the Management Tree into the list of available backgrounds. This is very useful
if you've imported data that needed to be edited or that you decide you would just like to use as a background instead
of having it in the Management Tree.
Export
Allows the export of data from the level that is currently selected in the Management Tree.
About the Job/Task Tree
The Job/Task Tree allows you to select, view, and edit Jobs and Tasks that you have created. A Job is defined as one
or more Tasks that you plan on occurring during a specified time span. A Task is defined as an operation(s) that you
plan to occur in a specific field during a specified time span. Multiple Tasks can be added to a Job and multiple
operations can be set for a Task. An example would be that you make a Job for your spring planting. You add a Task
for each field you plan to plant, set the Planned datasets for each field to the planting prescription for that field and
leave the Actual datasets selection blank. After you plant your fields and read in the as-applied data, you can then link
the actual planting data to the planting Task for each field. You then have a record of what you planned to do in each
field and what actually happened. Jobs and Tasks also provide a very convenient and easy way to setup your devices
(monitors) and export all the prescriptions that you wish to use, in one process, instead of exporting each field
28
User Interface
individually. A summary of the Planned vs Actual values can also be seen based on selected levels in the Job/Task
Tree.
About the Calendar View (ADVANCED)
The Calendar View is a new and unique way to summarize, view, and edit your data. The Calendar View provides
access to your data based on when it was actually logged. This allows you to examine the time it took you to get a field
planted or harvested for example. Or by setting different filters and grouping options, you can see how long your entire
Corn harvest took. The calendar displays data as events, or spans of data based on a selected grouping or type, such
as a Note. These selection options allow you map the selected data in the calendar as well as view a summary of the
selection.
29
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Move the cursor over an area you would like more information about and if a hand icon appears click the left
mouse button to see more information.
Using the Calendar View.
Calendar Summary Window
Calendar View Window
Print Calendar
Click this button to print the current calendar view.
Calendar Data Filter
Click this button to set a dataset filter for the data to display in the calendar view.
Calendar Data Grouping
Click this button to set the grouping of data displayed in the calendar view. An example would be to set the grouping to
display events in the calendar by Field, Product, and Operation.
Month/Week/Day View Type Selection
Allows the selection of the view type for the Calendar View. You can select to view events on a Month basis(35 days at
a time), a Week view (7 days at a time), or a Day View which shows events for a day from 12 AM to 12 PM.
Date Selection
Allows the selection of a date to display events for, before, or after.
Calendar Menu
Add Event...
Select this option to add a manual event, such as a text Note. This allows you to make notes to document
events on certain days that you want to keep track of.
View/Edit Event...
Select this option to see a more detailed view of an event, such as the datasets it covers, the time span it
covers, etc.
Delete Event
30
User Interface
Select this option to delete a manual event that you have selected.
Move Event
Select this option to move a manual event that has been added to a new location on the calendar.
Adjust Event Start
Select this option to adjust the start date of a manual event.
Adjust Event End
Select this option to adjust the end date of a manual event.
About the Financial Entries Tree (ADVANCED)
The Financial Entries Tree allows you to add, edit, delete, and view Financial Tracking entries. When entries are
selected a summary of the entry will be displayed in the summary document. Click the Add Item icon in the toolbar to
add an entry to the tree or right click in the tree area and select Add Item.
Preview Window
About the Preview Window
The Preview Window allows you to quickly and easily see if spatial data exists for a selection(s) in the Management
Tree. It is a powerful tool that allows you to decide what data to create a new map of or add as a layer on an existing
map. It can also be used in the Job/Task Tree when a selection is made at the Operation level or lower.
31
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Create New Map >> Button
Click this button when it is bold to add the data in the window below to a new main map window.
Add to Current Map >> Button
Click this button when it is bold to add a new layer to the active map using the data shown in the window below.
Map Data Preview Window
This window displays a preview of map data, if available, for the current selection in the Management Tree.
How to Information and Other Links:
Using the Preview Window
How to make a map.
How to Add a Layer to a Map
Document Windows
About Document Windows
The Document Windows provide a means for displaying maps, reports, charts, results, summaries, etc. They are the
main mechanism in the software for viewing and printing information in the system.
All Document Window names can be edited by clicking your right mouse button on the document tab name and
selecting the Rename Tab option from the menu that appears. Documents can also be closed from the same menu.
Summary Window
The Summary View displays the summary information for the current selection in the Hierarchy Tree and either the
Monitor, Spatial, Manual, or User Defined Summary types. The example below shows a load summary for a field so
that is selected in the Management Tree. The Operational Instance is selected for a particular Operation Type and
Crop/Product, thus displaying all the loads for that instance. Summary information can also be viewed for the
Properties, Associated Data , Financial Tracking Entries , and individual spatial record values that are tied to the
current management item selection.
How to Information and Other Links:
32
User Interface
Select/Edit Summary Items to be Displayed
How to change the items displayed in the summary.
How to print the Summary Window Information.
Basic:
Advanced:
33
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Summary Type Selection
Four options are available for displaying different types of summary information:
Monitor Summary
Displays summary results based on monitor totals only. Select this option if you want to see summary
results that match the closest with what you saw on your monitor in the field.
Spatial Data Records
Displays summary results based on spatial data only.
Manual Entries
Displays summary results that have been manually entered into the software by the user.
User Defined
Displays the custom summary results that can be defined and edited under the Edit Menu and General
Summary. The software defaults to this option and the default setup is a mixture of Monitor and Spatial
Data Record summaries.
Summary Tabs
General
Displays summary information for the currently selected management item in the Management Tree or for
a calendar event selected in the Calendar View .
Properties
Displays the properties and Resource Tracking entries (Only at the dataset level) for a selected
management item in the Management Tree.
Linked Items
Displays the items that have been linked to the selected management item in the Management tree.
Images, documents, or any file can be linked to a management item. From this window you can view or
open a linked item or create a copy of the linked item to be saved at a location you select, such as on a
PC card, USB stick, or server location.
34
User Interface
Associated
Displays associated data entries for a selected management item in the Management Tree.
Financial Entries (ADVANCED)
Displays the Financial Tracking values for a selected management item in the Management Tree or
displays a Financial Tracking entry definition(s) based on a selection in the Financial Entries Tree..
Dataset Values
Click the Load Raw Data button to load the actual data entries for a selected dataset(s) in the
Management Tree. This is very useful for viewing soil sampling results or values for a group of polygons
like a soil type mad. The main difference between this tab and the General Summary tab is that the
General tab shows totals and/or averages for the entire dataset and not the individual entries that make up
the dataset. It is not advised that this option be used on large yield datasets, as it can take a long amount
of time to load and display all the raw data for these types of datasets.
Map Window
The Map View contains the map display, map toolbar and the Layer window. Multiple Map Views can be created and
toggled.
How to Information and Other Links:
Mapping
How to make a map.
How to Add a Layer to a Map
Basic:
Advanced:
35
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Move the cursor over an area you would like more information about and if a hand icon appears click the left
mouse button to see more information.
Map Window Toolbar
Reset Cursor
Resets the toolbar selections so that none are selected. This is useful if you want to cancel a selected function on
the toolbar.
Zoom Out
Click this button to scale the map window out once.
Zoom In
Click this button to scale the map window in once.
Zoom to Box
Click this button to zoom to a box area defined by the user.
Specialty Zooms
Zoom World
Click this button to zoom to the extent of all data currently on the map.
Zoom Previous
Click this button to zoom to the last zoom extent.
Zoom Selection
Click this button to zoom to the current layer selection.
Pan
Allows the user to drag the current contents of the map with the mouse in any direction.
36
User Interface
Measure
Line
Tape measure feature that allows the user to select a start and endpoint for a line and see the distance
between the points.
Multi-Line
Tape measure feature that allows the drawing of multiple, connected line segments and see a running
total of overall distance from the start of the first segment to the endpoint of the last one.
Label Tools
Move Label
When User-Defined is selected on the Label Placement tab when editing Layer Options, this option will
become active. When selected it allows the user to drag labels to any location on a map. To use, click on
an object on the active layer that you want to move a label for and hold the mouse button down. The
cursor will jump to the label location. Keep the mouse button held down and move the label to the desired
location and then release the mouse button. Any label adjustments made from the map toolbar will not be
saved after the map is closed. Only label changes made in an editor can be saved.
Label Settings
Allows the user to set various parameters for the display of labels for each object in a layer when UserDefined has been selected as the Label Placement type. Click on an object in the active layer to edit its
label properties. Any label adjustments made from the map toolbar will not be saved after the map is
closed. Only label changes made in an editor can be saved.
Rotate Map (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to rotate the 3D view about the X, Y, and Z axis.
Hide/Show 3D View (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to toggle between displaying the current map in 2D or 3D view.
Reset Map Rotation (ADVANCED)
Allows the user to reset the orientation and zoom level of the current 3D view to the default orientation.
Dataset Playback (ADVANCED)
Opens the Dataset Playback viewer which allows you to replay a logged field operation such as harvest or planting.
You can control the speed at which the data plays as well as transparency, legend, etc. Multiple vehicles can also be
played at the same time, such as if you harvest a field with two combines equipped with yield monitors and GPS.
This playback tool only works with data that contains swath width and date/time data, which is required to play the
data back based on time. The playback also displays a real-time summary of the data as you play it, displaying the
instantaneous value of the points as they are mapped as well as a running average and total for the data.
Internet Based Background
Allows the user to select which internet based background they would like displayed in their map, if any. You can
select None, Aerial, Road Map, or a combination of aerial and road map. These backgrounds are not saved in the
management tree or anywhere else in the software, they are temporary in nature and downloaded dynamically.
Set Background
Allows the user to select a background(s) to be viewed on the active map.
Map Options
Allows the user to edit the map options for the active map.
Select Type
Select Objects
When this selection type is selected, entire objects are selected when using one of the selection tools. For
example if Select Polygon is selected and you draw a selection that crosses the edge of a polygon, the
whole polygon will be selected not just the intersected area.
Select Intersections
When this selection type is selected, only the intersected area of an object is selected. For example if the
Select Polygon tool is selected and a region is drawn across a quarter of a line segment, then only that
length of the line that fell in the selection area will be selected.
Select Tools
Select Point
Allows the user to select an individual spatial point.
Select Rectangle
Allows the user to select a region with a box.
37
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Select Polygon
Allows the user to select a region with a polygon.
Select Circle
Allows the user to select a region with a circle.
Select Ellipse
Allows the user to select a region with an ellipse.
Select Pass
Allows the user to select a pass. Only valid for point or smart rectangle map types.
Select by Legend Range
Allows the user to select a spatial object on the map and all other spatial objects with the same legend
value will also be selected.
Select Via Filter
Allows the user to select a region using data filters that the user defines, from the current layer. Data filters
can be based on spatial statistics, attributes, and properties and in combinations. Advanced allows you to
filter based on multiple layers and not just the current layer.
Invert Selection
Allows the user to invert the current selection on the map, selecting all other items on the current layer
other than the ones that are currently selected.
Query Tools
Query Current Layer
Activates the query feature for the current layer.
Query Multiple Layers
Activates the query feature for all layers that have been selected to be included in the multi-layer query.
Organize Layers
Allows the user to reorder or delete layers in the active map.
Edit Layer
Allows the user to edit the current layer in the active map if it is editable.
Notes
Layer Notes
Allows the user to add a spatial note(s) to the current dataset layer. These notes are tied to the specific
dataset they are added to and can only be viewed/edited when the same dataset is mapped.
Landmark Notes
Allows the user to add a landmark note(s) that will be displayed whenever spatial data is mapped. These
landmark notes allow the marking and notation of permanent landscape features such as wells, pump
heads, builds, etc.
New
Allows the user to create one of the following file types:
Boundary Map
Allows the user to create a new boundary dataset for the current layer in the active map.
Generic
Allows the user to create a new generic dataset that can contain point, line, or polygon data. The user can
also define and add new attributes for a generic dataset.
Navigation Map
Allows the user to create a new navigation dataset for the current layer in the active map.
Prescription Map
Allows the user to create a new prescription dataset for the active map.
Soil Sampling Map
Allows the user to create a soil sampling dataset using a gridding wizard. Soil sampling lab results can
then be imported and tied to the points.
Scouting Map
Allows the user to create a scouting dataset(s) by drawing regions or gridding an area. Scouting data specific
to different pests can also be created and saved as their own scouting operations based on pest type.
38
User Interface
Map Properties Tabs
Properties for the map are displayed at the bottom of each map as buttons/tabs which open views of additional
information related to the current map. To open the views, move your mouse over the button/tab and it will
automatically expand as long as you keep the cursor over its displayed area, and then hide again when move you
move off the area. You can also click the pin icon in the right corner of the window to make it have a fixed location and
not auto hide.
Map Summary, Query Results, Elevation Profile, and Picture Notes views are available currently for viewing.
Select one of the topics below for more information:
Map Summary View
Query Results View
Picture Notes View
Elevation Profile View
3D Plot Window (ADVANCED)
The 3D Plot document window displays a 3D plot of a selected dataset from the Management Tree. It provides various
tools and settings for manipulating and displaying the 3D Plot. The 3D Plot can also be printed.
39
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
3D Plot Toolbar
Reset Cursor
Resets the toolbar selections so that none are selected. This is useful if you want to cancel a selected function on
the toolbar.
Zoom Out
Click this button to scale the map window out once.
Zoom In
Click this button to scale the map window in once.
Zoom to Box
Click this button to zoom to a box area defined by the user.
Specialty Zooms
Zoom World
Click this button to zoom to the extent of all data currently on the map.
Zoom Previous
Click this button to zoom to the last zoom extent.
Zoom Selection
Click this button to zoom to the current layer selection.
Pan
Allows the user to drag the current contents of the map with the mouse in any direction.
Rotate Map
Allows the user to rotate the 3D view about the X, Y, and Z axis. .
Reset Plot Rotation
Allows the user to reset the orientation and zoom level of the current 3D plot to the default orientation.
Plot Options
40
User Interface
Allows the user to set various plot options that are independent of what attribute is being plotted, such as line colors,
orientation, etc.
3D Plot Control Window
Attribute Selection
Allows the selection of an attribute to be plotted from the current dataset.
Plot Display Type
There are two possible display types for plots. One is a smooth Surface (gridded and contoured) and the other is a
Bar Plot where each gridded cell represents a bar with a vertical (Z) height based on the selected attribute to plot.
Edit Options
Allows editing of the various display and generation parameters for the 3D Plot. Defaults for viewing selected
operations and attributes can also be saved.
Edit Legend
Allows the editing and saving of legends to be displayed.
Plot Legend
Displays the legend for the plotted attribute.
Calendar Summary Document Window (ADVANCED)
The Calendar Summary Document Window displays a summary of the current event selection in the Calendar View.
The grouping selections can be changed for the summary display, but the attributes that are displayed are based on
the summary attributes that have been set for the operation that data is being displayed for. The Calendar summary
can be printed and exported to HTML.
41
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Report Document Window
The Report Document displays the results of generating a report. You can edit the dataset filters for the report and the
options for displaying the repot from the document without rerunning the report. You can also print the report to export
it to HTML.
Job/Task Summary Document Window
The Job Summary Document Window displays a summary of the current selection in the Job/Task Tree. The
summary formatting will vary based on the selected level in the Job/Task Tree. The Job/Task summary can be printed
and/or exported to HTML.
42
User Interface
Chart Document Window
The Chart Document displays the results of generating a chart. You can edit the dataset filters for the chart and the
options for displaying the chart from the document without rerunning the chart .You can print the chart or save it as an
image file.
43
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Analysis Document Window (ADVANCED)
The Analysis Document window displays the analysis results that are of a report and/or chart type. The Comparison
analysis function and the Financial Tracking Reports/Charts are the only analysis functions that use the Analysis
document currently. The Report and Chart(s) can be edited in terms of what and how they display. You can also print
them and either export to HTML or save them as image files. New charts can also be added based on available
attributes in the result data by going to the Edit Menu and selecting Add Chart.
44
User Interface
45
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Booklet Document Window (ADVANCED)
The Booklet Document window displays the result of running the Booklet Printing... option. Each type of output you
selected for you booklet and the instances of those types depending on what level in the management hierarchy you
place them, will generate a tab in the booklet document. Some of these tabs will show the final result that will be
printed, such as the Title Page or Analysis Reports/Charts. But other types such as Print Layouts will only display the
base data that will be used to generate the final print layout. This is done to save memory, since each print layout page
can take up 5-6MB of memory at default settings and there can be multiple pages defined for a print layout. It should
also be noted that the Table of Contents page is not generated until you start printing. It will also be the last page
printed, and then you can manually insert it after the Title Page.
Once the Booklet Document is generated, you can then preview individual pages by selecting the tabs and then Print
Preview or you can delete individual pages that you want removed from the booklet. Result pages can even be edited
in some cases, such as for reports or charts, which you can change the formatting of before you print. In addition to
printing you can also save the booklet as an HTML result which will generate multiple files for you that link to an index
page that allows you to link to the individual booklet result pages that have been generated.
46
User Interface
Linked Item Document Window
The Linked Item Document window allows the user to view linked items that can be viewed within the desktop software
without requiring and external viewer. Currently images/photos, PDF's, web links, and text files can be viewed directly
within the software. Any other unknown/unsupported formats will be loaded if possible by the application that your
computer has associated with that format, such as MS Word for *.doc files or MS EXCEL for *.xls files. Each viewer for
the supported formats will provide tools that are appropriate for the format, such as zoom or search tools for PDF
documents.
47
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Layer Window
About the Layer Window
The Layer Window contains information and controls pertaining to the data contained in a map. This can include a
single dataset/layer or multiple layers. The window allows you to easily move between layers, change the visualization
method, control data visibility, edit/create legends, zoom, select attributes/properties to map, etc.
How to Information and Other Links:
Edit Legend
Using the Layer Window
How to edit a legend.
48
User Interface
Layer Button
Displays the layer visible check box, layer name, and the remove layer button. Also indicates whether a layer is the
active layer and whether it is on or off. The active layer is the one with a border around the layer button and on some
OS's will display with a highlighted color. Clicking on a layer button expands the button to show all the options, current
settings, legend for the layer, and makes it the active layer. Right clicking the mouse button while the cursor is over a
layer button will provide a menu of options for changing how a layer is displayed in the Layer Control, also see Layer
Display Menu Button description below.
Layer ON/OFF Check Box
This check box makes the selected layer visible when checked. This is useful when many layers are open
for the same spatial area.
Close Layer Button
Click this button to close the layer.
49
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Attribute/Property Selection Box
Displays the current attribute or property that is being mapped for the layer in the Map window. Clicking on the down
arrow on the right side of this box shows a drop down list of all the attributes and properties that can be mapped for
the current layer. Click on one of the attributes or properties to change the data being mapped in the Map Window for
the current layer.
Select Mappable Attributes/Properties Button
Click this button to select the attributes or properties that will be available to map. Selected properties will be saved per
the operation of your current layer that is mapped. All selections you to set to mappable will be displayed in the
Attribute/Property Selection Box in the Layer Control.
Show/Hide Extended Layer Options Button
This button, the thin button with three arrowheads on it, allows you to show or hide the layer option buttons and
controls below it.
Map Type Buttons
These five buttons change the way that data is displayed in the Map Window.
Base Map
Creates a raw data map of a spatial dataset, i.e. point data, polygons, lines, etc in their raw form.
Swath Map
Creates a map based on spatial points plotted as polygon objects that are created from the swath width,
distance traveled and heading (track) for the logged point. Track must be included in the dataset being
mapped to display the data as this map type.
Note: An option is provided in the Edit Layer Options dialog to show the swath map as
individual, non-connected rectangles.
Sections/Rows Map
Creates a map of the individual sections/rows contained in a dataset. This allows the mapping of sensor data
that was logged at a higher resolution than a full swath, such as row by row. Not all data supports or contains
this level of information. To make sections/rows data available you must check one of the "Create individual
..." options on the GPS Settings tab when archiving files or reprocessing data and select either to generate
Section or Row level data.
Configure Sections/Rows Button
Allows the selection of which sections/rows to map. You can select all, one, or a combination of
sections/rows to display.
Grid Map
Creates a map based on averaged values for a user set grid size. See Edit Layer Options.
Contour Map
Creates a map based on averaged and smoothed values for a user set grid size. See Edit Layer Options.
Transparency Slider Bar
Sets the transparency level of the current layer and attribute to a value from 10 to 100 percent, 100 percent being
completely solid.
Edit Layer Options Button
Click this button to go to the Layer and Attribute/Property Options Dialog. Allows the user to edit the layer, sub-layer,
and attribute/property options for the current layer in the active map. This includes setting whether marks are turned
on or off, point diameter size, grid size, properties for spatial datasets, contour parameters, etc..
Edit Legend Button
Clicking this button opens the Edit Legend Dialog. This allows you set the various parameters for the legend, marks,
and view statistical information for the layer.
Layer Zoom Button
Clicking this button will zoom to the extents of the current layer on the map. This is useful when you have many layers
open and would like to quickly go to a specific layer on the map.
Layer Display Menu (Right click in grey areas of the Layer control or on the Layer button)
Right click to display a menu of options that modify how a layer is displayed in the Layer Window, such as moving
layers up/down, renaming them, or removing them.
Legend Area
Displays the legend for the current layer and selected attribute. Also displays the legend for marks , buffers, and layer
notes data if present. Double clicking with the left mouse button in the legend area will open the Edit Legend dialog.
Show/Hide Layer Statistics Button
50
User Interface
This button, the thin button with three arrowheads on it, allows you to show or hide the layer stats displayed below the
legend.
Layer Statistics Area
This area displays summary stats for numeric attribute/property items for the current layer and a selection on the layer.
This area can be hidden.
51
Data Processing
Processing Data
The software provides a number of options for processing the data you are reading into the system or data already in
the system. The software allows you to set processing settings for the particular type of data and the product/crop that
data was collected for as well as settings for GPS position data correction and filtering.
Select one of the following topics below on processing data and files:
Select File Reading Option
File Selection/Search Options
Select Files to Download and/or Import From AgFiniti
Results of File Search/Selection
Set Management Items for New Data
Select Management
Archiving Options
Management and Processing Settings
Processing New Data
The software provides a wizard interface for reading Ag Leader, Case IH, Flexi-Coil, JD Greenstar, Mid-Tech, New
Holland, RDS , and Trimble files into the system. This wizard interface greatly simplifies entering your files into the
system.
How to read Ag Leader, Case IH, JD Greenstar, RDS, New Holland, Mid-Tech, or Flexi-Coil files into the system.
How to migrate your data from Precision Map 2000 or Instant Yield Map Software
A process for reading Ag Leader AGDATA and AGSETUP files is also provided via the AgFiniti cloud-based service. It
provides similar functionality and the same processing wizards as above but allows you to download files that have
been placed in the AgFiniti cloud. This feature requires an AgFiniti File Transfer license to function.
Reprocessing Data Already in the System
Once data that supports reprocessing has been read into the system, you have the option to reprocess the data to
make changes to the data that is displayed when you create a map(s) or layer(s).
How to reprocess data.
Reprocessing Files that have Already Been Read into the System
If you delete files from the Management Tree using the Delete Branch selection, the proper way to get the deleted data
back into the system is to use the Reprocess Files…selection under the Services menu. The reason this is the
preferred method is that the software does not allow duplicate files to be read into the Data Vault where all the files you
read in are stored. Since the file has already been read into the system once, this feature allows you to select files
already in the vault and reprocess them. Please note that this tool should not be used to adjust processing settings for
data already in the system, use Reprocess Data..under the Management Tree Menu to do that.
Reprocess Files
Syncing With SMS Mobile
The software provides you the ability to sync or import data from Ag Leader Technology's SMS Mobile software. This
feature allows you to directly sync with an SMS Mobile project(s) that was exported from the software or you can
import data that was created in another software or that was created from scratch in the field.
Select one of the topics below for more information on syncing or importing from SMS Mobile:
SMS Mobile Data Folder Search Options
Select Mobile Projects
Mobile Project Processing Settings
How_to_Sync/Import_from_SMS_Mobile
53
Data Management
Data Management
The software provides a number of different methods and tools for ensuring that your data is managed properly. These
include automatic management features like the Spatial Sorter or manually setting the management settings for an
item in the Management Tree such as a Field.
NOTE: Do not remove any files, such as YLD’s, from the system Data Vault. Doing so may cause unexpected
results such as not being able to map data in the system or read in new files. Files stored in the vault are
linked to other data files within the system or database. Removing these files will cause problems for other
items in the system that are referenced to them. Please contact Technical Support for assistance in removing
data files from the system properly. In general, do not delete any files from the system Data directory without
first consulting with Technical Support.
Select one of the topics below on data management in the system:
Select Management
Management Item Editor
Apply Management Changes
Archiving Options
Reassign Resource Tracking
Reassign Pest
Reassign Associated Data
Managing Farms
How to manually move a Farm
How to spatially sort Fields into Farms.
Managing Fields
Merge Fields
How to freeze a boundary.
How to spatially sort Loads/Regions into Fields.
How to split and sort a load or region.
How to manually move a Field.
Managing Other Items in the Management Tree
How to manually move other management items (Year, Load, etc.).
Workspaces
The software allows you to save and open Workspaces. A workspace is like a bookmark you would place when
reading a book or pausing your VCR. It allows you to save the map(s) and layer(s) that you currently have open, close
the software or clear all your maps and work on something else, and then reopen a workspace and start back from
where you were when you saved the workspace. The added benefit of workspaces is that even though you have
saved a workspace from a previous session, any new data that has come into the system for the saved workspace will
be updated with the latest information. This saves a lot of time and confusion that can be caused by not knowing if
your data layers are always up-to-date or not.
Workspaces can also be launched from wherever they have been saved by double clicking on the workspace icon. If
you save a workspace to your desktop for example, you can double click on the software icon with the workspace
name you entered and the software will automatically start and load the saved workspace.
Note:
Workspaces created in prior versions may not be supported in newer versions.
55
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
How to save a workspace.
How to open a workspace.
Projects
Projects are a high level way to manage and separate data from multiple users, clients, partners, etc. Projects create
unique databases and data vaults for the data processed into them. You can not access, view, map, etc data from a
different project; only the one that you currently have open.
Project control is provided for both Basic and Advanced users, but is limited in functionality for Basic users. Basic
users are limited to five total projects while Advanced users can create an unlimited number. Basic users also don't
have access to all the available tools for Projects such as Move, Check-in/Out, and using multiple Data Locations.
Projects also provide added security by allowing for the entry of passwords to restrict who can open and use/modify
data in a project. Individual projects can even be backed up and sent to another user to restore into their system. This
is especially useful when dealing with another user if you need to transfer all the data you have processed and setup
for them.
Notes: Restoring an individual project or an entire set of projects can delete your current project(s) from
your system and replace it with the one(s) in the backup if you select the option to replace your project(s)
during restore. Make sure you have backed up any data that you do not want to lose prior to replacing a
project with another one.
Files should not be removed, added, or edited in the Vault unless you are directed to do so by Technical
Support. Doing so will cause damage to your data structure in the software and lead to data corruption,
crashes, and issues when migrating to new versions.
For Advanced, multiple Data Locations can be created and managed. A Data Location is where your projects and data
are stored. You can quickly switch between different Data Locations which may be on your local machine, on your
local network, or on remote servers in different locations. You can move projects between Data Locations, create
scheduled backups across Data Locations, check out projects between Data Locations, or even run multi-project
analysis functions across multiple Data Locations.
The Transfer Utilities can also be used in regard to projects in that you can create new management items such as
products or vehicles, write equations, or custom reports and charts in one project and then select an option in the
Transfer Utilities called Set as Project Transfer Default. Then the next time you open a different project it will check to
see if it has the latest default transfer that was set and if not it will prompt you to load the default transfer, which will
then help make sure that all your projects have custom items and settings that you create, without having to reenter
them manually in each unique project.
Comparison and Correlation analysis functions can be run across multiple projects, providing an extremely powerful
tool for comparing data across projects (different growers data) thus allowing you to keep the data between the
projects private and secure but still allowing access for analysis purposes.
Project Check-In/Out is allowed to provide another level of control for Projects for Advanced users. This allows you to
Check-Out a project from one Data Location to another (say from a server to your local computer), where you can
access the project even when you aren't connected to the server. This is extremely useful when you are using a laptop
and visiting customers and you want to take their project with you. Once you have made any changes to the project or
done consulting with the customer, you can Check-In the project and replace the old version that was on the server
with your updated version of the project. History information is also maintained on the projects that can be viewed to
indicate when and why the project was checked-in/out and by whom. New projects that are created while you are
disconnected from the server can also be moved onto the server when you reconnect to it. This allows you to add new
customers/projects while disconnected and then easily/quickly add them to your server installation (Data Location) so
they can be properly managed and backed up.
Select one of the topics below on projects:
56
Data Management
Projects Dialog
Create New Project
Edit Project
Project Groups
Forgot Password?
Move Projects
Edit Data Location(s)
57
Mapping and Viewing Data
Mapping Data
The software allows you to create multiple maps that can have multiple layers within each map. Mapping in the
software is point-and-click orientated. Selections in the Management Tree (if it has GPS data) can be used to create a
map or added to a current map as another layer.
Map projection is another important feature of the software. A map datum and projection ensures that your data is
properly displayed for your specific location on Earth. Data is almost always collected with the datum WGS84 with a
Lat/Lon projection. This can create maps that may not be spatially correct for your farm when mapped, so selecting a
proper datum and projection for your region is a good idea. The software will automatically recommend a datum and
projection for your data when you make your first data map unless you have already manually set them by selecting a
Grower and then Edit Item.
Select one of the following topics to see more information on mapping in the software:
Map Window
Using the Layer Window
Map Options
How to set your map projection.
How to make a map.
How to Add a Layer to a Map
Map Backgrounds
The software allows you to set background layers for maps. Background layers are intended for reference purposes
only and are not selectable or viewable in the Management Tree and can not be ordered or controlled through the
Layer window. Multiple backgrounds can be set for display. Backgrounds can currently be imported from the following
sources; Image files (BMP’s, TIFF’s, GeoTIFF’s, MrSid, etc), ESRI Shape files, MapInfo Mid/Mif files, and TIGER files.
Backgrounds can also be linked to an existing Farm or Field for display whenever the Farm, its associated Grower, or
a Field is selected to map. To link Backgrounds, edit the Farm or Field from the Management Tree or via the
Management List Editor under the Tools Menu. In addition options are provided for assigned/linked backgrounds in
terms of where and how they will be displayed and used.
Background layers can also be created by copying a selected dataset from the Management Tree via the Copy
Dataset to Background List option in the Management Tree menu
In addition background layers can also be saved back to the Management Tree as normal datasets via the
Background Layer Utility under the Services Menu.
If you have an internet connection available, a special internet based background layer can be enabled for your current
map as well. The Internet Based Background is available for all maps and provides the option to show aerial only, road
map only, or a combination of aerial and road map as a background layer. You can still have the backgrounds
described above as well but the Internet Based Background will always display as the bottom layer below all other
layers. The Internet Based Background is not saved into your software and updates as needed and will automatically
try to display the highest accuracy information that it has access to from the internet.
Lastly, special options are provided for including backgrounds on print layouts that allow control of displaying
background layers with other map data that is being printed.
Select a topic below on map backgrounds:
Set Background
Select Background
Background Settings
Farm/Field Backgrounds
Background Layer Utility
Background Layer Edit
How to geo-reference an Image.
59
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
How to import a GeoTIFF image file.
How to import an ESRI Shape, MapInfo Mid/Mif, DEM, or TIGER file.
How to set a map background(s).
Layering
The software allows you to create multiple layers of data on a map. This means you can create a map with a yield
layer, a boundary area, and an imported soil type map all stacked on top of each other, in the order you want. The
choice is yours.
The software also allows you to edit the name of a layer in the Layer window, change its order in the list of layers,
make a copy of the current layer in the active map, or remove the layer from the Layer window and map completely.
To access these options move your cursor over the layer button in the Layer window and click your right mouse button
and then make a selection from the menu that appears. You can also go to the Map menu and select Organize Layers
or select the Organize Layers icon on the Map toolbar to access the same function as above.
Select a topic below on layering:
About the Layer Window
Organize Map Layers
Layer and Attribute/Property Options
How to adjust layer and attribute/property options.
How to query a single layer.
How to query multiple layers.
Data Playback (ADVANCED)
The software provides the ability to playback your logged data in real time or an accelerated time. This means that
your map will display each point that you logged in the order it was logged. This gives you a view of actually how your
field was worked, which can be very valuable if you aren't operating your machinery and want to know what was going
on during field operations. You can even see a playback summary that shows, in real time, the values being logged
for each log point as you are running the playback. The playback summary displays the instantaneous, average, and
total values for selected attributes.
Any dataset that you have read into the system that contains swath width and date/time information can be run in the
Dataset Playback tool. To access the tool, create a map of the data to be played back and select the Dataset Playback
icon from the Map Toolbar or from the Map menu.
Select one of the following to see more information on this topic:
Dataset Playback
3D Mapping and Plotting (ADVANCED)
The software allows you to view data in different ways to a help you better visualize the data you have collected or
imported. Two such ways are the 3D Terrain view and 3D Plotting.
3D Terrain View
This is an option for viewing your data for any dataset that you have mapped that has a reference to a 3D grid. A 3D
grid is must be manually generated (in previous releases this was automatically generated). Any point data read into
the system or imported that contains latitude, longitude, and elevation data can be used to generate a 3D grid surface
using the Regenerate 3D Grid option in the Management Tree. Using the Batch Command Regenerate 3-D Grid you
can generate the 3D grid surface for multiple fields.
This option for data display is called the 3D Terrain view because it only displays the data based on the topography,
i.e. the elevation information. So what you see is an accurate, depending on the accuracy of the data used to build the
3D grid, depiction of the actual lay of your land. You can then add as many dataset layers onto the 3D surface as you
want to better visualize how your data might be affected by terrain.
The 3D terrain view can be toggled on and off from the Map Toolbar or menu. It can also be rotated as well as
zoomed. In addition, tooltips do still function in 3D but there can be an offset at times from what is displayed as a
value(s) vs where it appears the cursor is located, which is due to the rotation angle of the map. Also, the Query tools
do not function when the 3D Terrain view is toggled on.
Map Window
60
Mapping and Viewing Data
3D View Settings
How to display the 3D Terrain View.
3D Plot
This is a display option that takes your selected dataset from the Management Tree and generates a 3D Plot, which is
independent of normal mapping. 3D Plotting differs from the 3D Terrain View in that 3D Plotting is more geared
towards raw data visualization and is not as interested in accurate mapping, layering, etc. 3D Plotting allows the
selection of any of the attributes in a dataset to be selected to use for generation of the Z-Axis, which is the surface of
the 3D Plot. The 3D Terrain View only uses elevation for the surface and is intended to try and depict as best as
possible the actual terrain of a field. 3D Plot only allows the plotting of one dataset or Operation Instance at a time to
help you visualize the data in the third-dimension.
3D Plot Window
3D Plot Attribute Options
3D Plot Options
3D Plot Settings
3D Plot Settings Utility
How to create a 3D Plot
61
Legends
Legends
The software provides a number of useful features and customization options for legends. You can load and save
legends you create and also set your legends as defaults for a particular layer, an operation, or as a global default.
Custom legends can be set for attributes, properties, marks, buffers (ADVANCED), and notes. This allows you to set
specific legends for data that was used for testing purposes or that you want segregated from similar data.
Select one of the following topics on legends:
Legend Window
Edit Legend
Load Legend
Save Legend
Legend Utilities
How to edit a legend.
63
Creating and Editing Data
Creating Data
The software allows you to create many different types of data that can be managed in the system or used for export
purposes only.
Select a topic below on creating data in the system:
Attributes
Attributes are defined as frequently changing data and are used to convey actual values, logged or entered, for an
operation. So yield data that is logged continuously and is varying from logged value to logged value, would be an
attribute for example. The system has many predefined attributes already which do have some adjustable settings, but
there are times when a user defined attribute may be needed to support data contained in an import file. Also, User
Defined operations can be created and you can create your own attributes specifically for them in Advanced..
Attribute Editor
Select Attribute
Remove Unused Attributes/Properties
How to create a new attribute.
Properties
Properties are defined as infrequently changing data used to define other management and data items. Names for
Farms, Fields, and Loads are examples of predefined properties within the system. User defined properties can be
created that can be linked to management items and datasets. This can be useful for general management purposes
for attaching additional information to an item. An example would be to create a property called Variety and then add
this property to harvest loads and then entering the variety name for the crop that was planted or harvested in the load.
Once a property has been added it can be used to filter data in queries, reports, and charts for example. Properties
created in the system can be deleted if they have not been applied to a dataset so when creating new properties
carefully consider what type of property you will be creating and how you intend to use it.
Property Editor
Select Property
Additional Properties
Remove Unused Attributes/Properties
How to create a new property.
How to add a property to a management item or dataset.
Operations (ADVANCED)
Custom Operations can be created in the software. These custom operations will all be of a Generic type and use the
Generic Editor for data creation and editing purposes. The unique aspect of these custom operations is that you select
what attributes will be tied to the operation and also which attributes will be required to be set when importing data for
this operation. this allows you to make specific operations for a specific type of data you will be importing and the data
will not import unless you set the required attributes for the operation. To create or edit a new Operation go to the
Tools Menu and select Management List Editor.
Only new operations that are created can me modified, except for the Soil Sampling, Scouting, and Crop Plan
Operations that already exist in the system. These are the only factory default operations that are editable, the reason
being so that if you desire you can set-up these operations to only have the attributes by default that you actually use
and also in the units that you desire, such as Lbs/ac vs PPM.
Edit Management Item Lists
How to create/edit a custom Operation
Crop Plans
Crop plans can be created in the software to help you track and plan your crop production cycle, spatially.
Crop plans can be created for each of your crop production operations and their unique products. By default
the system has a number of predefined crop plan types, such as for Planting, Spraying, and Fertilizing.
65
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Additional custom Crop Plan types can also be created as new operations and you can assign your own
attributes to define a custom crop plan. Default Crop Plans can also be customized. Crop plan datasets are
polygon based only, and by default are created from your frozen/traced field boundary but can be edited if
desired.
Crop Plan Editor
Select Crop Plan Operation(s) and Product(s)
Define Crop Plan
How to create a crop plan.
As-Applied and Split Planter Data
Because many system cannot log multiple products or rates and sometimes just log coverage there is a need
to properly document what actually was applied in the field. The Create As-Applied tool allows you to take
data that was not logged as split planter or multi-product/rate data, but was applied as such, and create new
data that represents teh real applications that occurred. The tool works on any As-applied or Site Verification
data. In the case of Planting and Seeding data it allows you to properly define the section swath widths and
the product and/or rates that were not logged. For Site Verification, it allows you to define rates and section
swath widths to create application rate data even though it wasn't logged as such. The Create As-Applied tool
can be run on selected datasets from the Management Tree or via a batch command function.
Create As-Applied Data Settings
Application Equipment Settings
Equipment Swath Section Settings
How to create as-applied or split planter data
Boundary Data
Boundary data can be created based on a map and its layers. The boundary that is created can then be set as a Farm
or Field boundary for Spatial Sorting, saved into the management system and displayed in the Management Tree, or
exported directly to an ESRI Shape file or ASCII text file.
Boundary Editor
How to create a boundary
Generic Data
Generic Data can be created based on a map and its layers. Objects such a polygons, points, and lines can be
created in the generic editor. Attributes can be added to or created for a generic dataset, thus allowing full
customization of the data that can be entered for generic data that is created. Generic data can also be edited or
exported in many of the available export formats. Using the generic editor you can create Tile Line maps, landmark
feature maps such as bin locations and equipment storage buildings, etc.
Generic Editor
How to create a generic dataset.
Guidance Data
Guidance data can be create based on a map and its layers. Guidance data created in the software consists of a
guidance area, headlands if set, and parallel guidance lines within the guidance area. The guidance data can then be
used for planning of field operations and/or exported to a supported field device that can use the guidance data to
provide assisted or automated guidance.
Guidance Editor
Guidance Settings
Headland Settings
Straight Line Settings
How to create a guidance dataset.
Navigation Data
Navigation data can be created based on a map and its layers. Navigation points can either be selected from the map
or manually entered in. Navigation data can be saved in the management system and displayed in the Management
Tree and exported as ESRI Shape, MID/MIF, ASCII text, or PFN navigation file for use in the Ag Leader PF3000 or
PF3000 Pro.
66
Creating and Editing Data
Navigation Editor
How to create navigation points.
Prescription Data
Prescription data can be created based on a map and its layers. Prescription rate values can be either manually
created using paint tools or can be created from the values contained in another data layer. The created prescription
data can be saved in the management system and displayed in the Management Tree and exported as an ESRI
Shape, MID/MIF, TGT prescription file for use in the Ag LeaderPF3000 or PF3000 Pro, PRE prescription files for use
in Flexi-Coil FlexControl systems or Case IH ADX Air Systems, and ENS prescription files for use in Case IH AFS
Planting and Seeding Systems.
Prescription Editor
Prescription Reference Layer Selection
Prescription Gridding Selection
Prescription Attribute Type and Units Selection
Edit Prescription Legend
Assign Legend Ranges
How to create a variable rate prescription.
Soil Sampling Data
Soil Sampling data can be created based on a map and its layers and or from imported data. Soil Sampling plans can
be generated manually by drawing regions or through the soil sampling wizard which guides you through the process
of creating sample points, grids, or regions. You can also manually add new sample points or edit existing sampling
datasets. Soil test results can also be imported to populate the soil sampling attribute entries for each sample point,
grid, or region or they can be manually entered. Soil sampling data can be saved in the management system and
displayed in the Management Tree and exported as ESRI Shape, MID/MIF, ASCII text, or PFN navigation file for use
in the Ag Leader PF3000 or PF3000 Pro.
Soil Sampling Editor
How to create a soil sampling dataset.
Scouting Data
Scouting data can be created based on a map and its layers. Scouting data can consist of just general observations
about crop conditions or it can also include pest observations. Scouting data is created and edited as a single dataset
but when saved, the different types of scouting information will be broken out automatically for you into unique scouting
operations in the management tree. Also scouting datasets are area based only, meaning they cant just be points or
lines. Once you have created and saved scouting data, you can then export this data as ESRI Shape, MID/MIF, ASCII
text, or to Ag Leader's SMS Mobile software.
Scouting Editor
How to create a Scouting dataset.
Plot Prescription Data (ADVANCED)
Plot Prescription data can be created based on a map and its layers. Only a single Plot Prescription can be created per
dataset. Plot Prescriptions are also created based on settings/parameters that are entered and only the start location
(baseline) for the plots are drawn or manually entered. Once created Plot Prescriptions can be exported as generic file
formats or as a planting prescription that can be export to the ALMACO SP360 controller.
Plot Prescription Editor
Tile Plan Data (ADVANCED)
Tile Plan data can be created based on a map and its layers. Tile Plans consist of tile runs that can be drawn. If a 3D
surface grid exists for the field then the tile runs will get a surface elevation value from the surface otherwise they will
get a value of zero. Tile Plans can be exported for use by the Ag Leader based Intelislope system or the Gradient
Intelislope system to install drainage tile.
Tile Plan Editor
How to create a tile plan.
Buffer Regions (ADVANCED)
Buffer regions can be created and tied to any object in the system. For example you can add a buffer region (polygon)
to a point, line, or polygon object. The unique thing about Buffer regions is that they remain associated to the object
you add them to, which is very much different than the Create Rings Tool, which make buffer/ring polygons for a
selected object that can be saved as whatever you want and loses any association with the object it was created from.
When you add a Buffer region to an object though, that buffer is then available for display, query, analysis, etc
67
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
whenever that object is mapped, printed, used in analysis, etc. It becomes a living addition that data that is always at
your disposal.
The Buffer Region tools are available on the Boundary, Generic, and Prescription Editors. A single inner and outer
Buffer Region can be added to a single object. Buffer Regions are considered a Sub-Layer like Mark and Note data
and settings can be set form them just like the other Sub-layer types. Specific legends can also be set for the Buffer
Regions.
How to add Buffer Regions to an object
Mosaic Data (ADVANCED)
Mosaic data is created by merging multiple single images into a single new image dataset. This is useful for reducing
the time it takes you to add images for each field. It is also useful for cleaning up image quality across multiple images
that may have been imported from different sources or from different times.
Mosaic Editor
Select Mosaic Layers
Mosaic Color Remap
Image Georeference
Notes Data
Spatial notes can be created based on a map and/or its layers. Two different types of spatial notes can be created;
Layer notes and Landmark notes. A Layer Note is a spatial note that is added to a specific dataset layer, such as a
yield map of soybeans for 1997. You could add a Layer Note to this dataset that indicated that there was a tile hole or
weed patch at a certain location. Only when you mapped this particular dataset would the Layer Note would appear on
the layer, as long as the Show Notes sub-layer option was turned on. A Landmark note on the other hand is intended
to apply to all maps that are made. You would add a Landmark Note to mark and note an area, terrain feature, etc that
is a permanent feature of the landscape that you want to make a note for. An example would be to add notes where
you had well heads or pump stations for irrigation. You would mark these using a Landmark Note because they are
independent of specific datasets and should be displayed when any dataset is mapped, for your reference. Spatial
notes can be edited and exported in various supported export formats.
Notes Editor
How to create spatial notes.
Associated Data
Associated data is a special type of data that can be created and associated with a management item, but is not used
for spatial or mapping purposes. Currently there are three types of associated data that can be created within the
system. They are Notes, Scale Tickets, and Cotton Gin Tickets. At this time data entered as associated data can only
be viewed in the Associated Data Viewer or in the Summary Window on the Associated tab. Printing of associated
data can only be accomplished from the Summary Window and the Associated tab.
Associated Data Viewer
Associated Editor
How to create associated data.
Editing Data
The software allows you to edit certain types of data that are stored in the management system.
Select a topic below on editing data in the system:
Properties
Property data added by the user can be edited or removed from a management item or dataset at any time by
selecting the management item or dataset to edit in the Management Tree, right clicking and selecting Edit Item, and
then Additional Properties.
Additional Properties
How to edit property data.
Operations
Some of the factory default Operations (Soil Sampling, Scouting, and Crop Plans) allow of customization of the
Operation. You can change what attributes are defaulted for that operation and they will automatically be added to new
datasets made for that Operation. Default values can even be set for attributes for use in exports and you can set
68
Creating and Editing Data
whether or not an attribute is required to import data for the operation . New Operations that are created by the user
can also be fully edited.
Edit Management Item Lists
How to create/edit a custom Operation (ADVANCED)
Crop Plans
Crop plan data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the
Map toolbar. One thing to note when editing a crop plan dataset is that even if you only have a single dataset from a
crop plan for a field selected to edit, when you enter the Crop Plan editor, all the datasets that currently exist for the
crop plan for the current year, operation, and operation instance will load into the editor as well. So if you have a field
split into Soybeans and Corn for your plan and you have just the Soybeans mapped and you select to edit the layer,
then the editor will actually show the Corn data as well. This was done to ensure that when editing you always know
what other data exists for your current crop plan so you and make more informed changes.
Crop Plan Editor
How to edit a crop plan.
Point Data
Point data can be manually edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon
on the Map toolbar. The only editing that can be done on point data from a map is the removal of points and the
straightening of passes. These editing options can be useful when there are GPS points plotted on the map that were
logged in error and the software was unable to filter or you have GPS data in a pass that could not be corrected by the
software and requires you to manually specify a line to straighten the pass by.
Point Map Edit
How to edit point data.
How to straighten a pass on a point dataset.
Boundary Data
Boundary data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the
Map toolbar.
Boundary Edit
How to edit a boundary.
Generic Data
Generic data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the
Map toolbar.
Generic Editor
How to edit generic data.
Guidance Data
Guidance data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the
Map toolbar. When editing guidance data the guidance area can not be edited, only the settings for the generation of
the headlands and guidance passes within the area. If you need to redefine the guidance area you must recreate it
from scratch. Also, imported guidance data in most cases can not be edited, especially if the imported data did not
have a guidance area defined with it.
Guidance Editor
Image Data (ADVANCED)
Imaged data that has been saved in the Management Tree can be edited by using the Layer selection under
the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the Map toolbar.
Image Editor
How to edit an image.
Navigation Data
Navigation data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the
Map toolbar.
69
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Navigation Edit
How to edit navigation points.
Prescription Data
Prescription data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on
the map toolbar.
Prescription Editor
How to edit a prescription dataset.
Soil Sampling Data
Soil sampling data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on
the Map toolbar.
Soil Sampling Editor
How to edit soil sampling data.
Scouting Data
Scouting data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the
Map toolbar.
Scouting Editor
How to edit scouting data
Plot Prescription Data (ADVANCED)
Plot Prescription data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon
on the Map toolbar.
Plot Prescription Editor
Tile Plan Data (ADVANCED)
Tile Plan data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on the
Map toolbar.
Tile Plan Editor
How to create a tile plan.
Installed Tile Data
Installed Tile data can be edited on a map by using the Layer selection under the Edit menu or the Edit Layer icon on
the Map toolbar.
Installed Tile Editor
Notes Data
Notes data can be edited on a map by using the Notes selection under the Edit menu and then Layer or Landmark
Notes or the Edit Layer icon on the Map toolbar and either Layer or Landmark Notes.
Notes Editor
How to edit spatial notes.
Associated Data
Associated Editor
How to edit an associated dataset.
70
Jobs and Tasks
About Jobs and Tasks
The software uses what we call Jobs and Tasks to help organize and summarize your field operations and make
setting up field devices, such as your monitor, easier. A Job is defined as a grouping of one or more Tasks that you
plan to perform during a certain time span. A Task is defined as one or more operations that are planned to occur in a
specific field.
The purpose of Jobs and Tasks is to provide planning and tracking of operations that will occur during the crop
production cycle. An example would be planning your entire spring planting. You would first write all your planting
prescriptions for all your fields that will be planted, then create a Job called "Spring 2004 Planting" and then add
Tasks, i.e. for each field you created a prescription for , to the Job. Now you have a record of what your plan for
planting your 2004 crop is, and if you log as-applied data with a monitor system and read it into the software, the
actual data will link up with the planned data and can be viewed in a summary so that you can compare your planned
vs actual results. Using Jobs you can also export all your assigned tasks at one time to your field device, so if you
have assigned 50 Tasks (fields) to a Job you can export their prescriptions, boundaries, or setup all in one simple
process.
Jobs and Tasks are also shown in the Calendar View. The planned time span of the Job will be displayed and when
the Job event is selected in the calendar, a summary is displayed that list all the Tasks that are assigned to the Job
and various properties of those tasks. The actual data that is logged and related to the Job and Task will also be
displayed in the calendar as its own event, based on the grouping and filtering that you have set for the Calendar
View, so that you can visually see what was planned for the Job vs the actual time span of the operations.
(ADVANCED)
Select a topic below on Jobs/Tasks:
Job/Task Summary Document Window
Job Summary Items
Job/Task Summary Item Pairs
Creating and Editing Jobs and Tasks
Jobs and Tasks can be created several different ways. Jobs and Tasks can come from a field device such as a
monitor, they can be manually created, or you can create a Task template that will automatically create Tasks or sort
data to existing Tasks when you run it.
Select a topic below on Jobs/Tasks:
Job Viewer
Job Editor
Task Editor
Define Task Sorting Template
How to create a Job and Task(s)
Exporting Jobs and Tasks
Jobs and Tasks can be used as a way to organize exports for a field device such as a monitor. It also provides a way
to export data in bulk, such as all the prescriptions for all the fields that you plan to work during an operation such as
planting. It also can export the setup information to provide such information as Field Names and boundaries.
Select a topic below on Jobs/Tasks:
Select Job Export Format
Export Setup File
How to export a Job
71
Data Analysis and Modification
Data Modification and Creation
The software provides various functions and tools to modify data from its raw form and provide adjusted or new
results. Functions that can be applied to data are broken down into two categories; Simple and General Analysis.
Select a topic below on data analysis and modification:
Manual Summary Entries
Manual summary values can be entered for attributes in a dataset. These values don’t replace existing monitor or
spatial summary values but are stored as an additional summary type that can be viewed in summaries and added to
reports, map layouts, etc. Manual summary values can also be added when actual data for attributes is not available
but is needed to calculate the values for other standard attributes in the system.
Manual Summary
Simple Analysis
Simple analysis involves applying a function to a specific attribute in a dataset. Simple analysis functions create a
modified version of the original data, but do not change the raw data itself. Five simple analysis functions are currently
available: Clip to Field Boundary, Filter Data, Normalize Data, Optimize Swath Widths, Reassign Attribute Values, and
Scale Data. Clip to Field Boundary allows you to clip any dataset in the system to a field boundary which is useful
when dealing with data that is of a spatial type only which can nor be clipped normally in the software. Filter Data
allows you to add a Minimum and Maximum filter values to a selected attribute. This is useful for imported data that
needs filtering, since imported data is not processed and filtered like YLD data files, for example. Normalize Data
creates a new normalized attribute based on a selected attribute. The data for the selected attribute is normalized
based on one of two normalization methods that are provided. Optimize Swath Widths checks each smart rectangle in
a dataset for overlap with another smart rectangle. If smart rectangles overlap then the software creates a polygon
area for each value that represents the true area of that value, thus eliminating the overlap that was present and
adjusting the values as appropriate. Reassign Attribute Values allows you to assign values in a dataset to a single new
value based on an entered range or a specific value to reassign. Scale data applies a scale factor to a selected
attribute. This is useful when your data needs to be manually adjusted, which can be the case if data being imported
into the system was not logged properly. Multiple simple analysis functions can be applied to a dataset, thus allowing
you to filter a dataset and also apply a scale factor to it for example.
Once a simple analysis function is applied to a dataset, a summation icon will display next to the dataset that has had
the function applied to it in the management tree. All data displayed in the summary, reports, etc will be spatially based
and not monitor based. If the function is removed and the data is reprocessed then the original summary data will be
displayed, as either monitor or spatial data depending on what it is and what it was originally set to. Also, when a
simple analysis function(s) has been applied to a dataset, and that data is used to generate a report, chart, or map
printout, the output format will be clearly marked that it contains modified data.
Select Analysis Operation
Analysis Attribute Selection
Analysis Value Entry
Reprocess Analysis
How to add a simple analysis function.
How to edit a simple analysis function(s).
How to remove a simple analysis function(s).
General Analysis - Merge Cotton Data
General analysis functions are different from simple analysis in that they are used to create new datasets or results.
They are not intended to modify the contents of an existing dataset. Currently, only one general analysis function is
available, the Merge Cotton Data function. This function is located under the Tool menu and is used to merge multiple
cotton pickings into a new dataset that represents the single area covered by the pickings but with the sum and
gridded average for the two pickings together.
Once a general analysis function has been used to generate a new dataset, a function icon will display next to the
dataset that has been create through general analysis.
73
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
When new data is read into the system that could affect the results presented in a dataset created through general
analysis, the Update Analysis tool can be run. This tool can be accessed by right clicking your mouse button on the
Management Tree which will re-run the general analysis function with the latest data contained in the system that
pertains to the general analysis dataset. This is very useful if you are harvesting over multiple days and need to update
the merged dataset or if you make calibrations changes in the monitor that you want applied to your base data and the
merged dataset.
How to merge cotton pickings.
How to update a merged cotton dataset.
Analysis Wizard (ADVANCED)
The Analysis Wizard provides access to various analysis functions that are available in the software. These functions
are provided in a wizard format to make using them easier and more structured, helping insure that your results don't
contain errors. The Analysis Wizard also allows the management and running of saved analysis function as well as the
ability to run functions in batch and some functions across separate projects.
Most of the analysis function are raster based, meaning all the analysis occurs on gridded data and the results
generated are gridded except for Cluster analysis results which are vector. Most of the functions allow you to specify
the grid size(s) that is used to increase or decrease the resolution of the results and analysis functions. Increasing the
grid size used can also reduce the time it takes for a function to run.
Image datasets can also be used in a number of the analysis functions. If you select an image dataset as an input, you
will have access to three attributes for that image dataset; Image Red, Image Green, and Image Blue bands. These
attributes are dimensionless and their values represent the image pixel values for each band, from 0-255.
Select a topic below on the Analysis Wizard and the analysis functions in it:
Select Analysis Type to Run
Analysis Editor
Multi-Project Analysis
Cluster Analysis
This analysis function provides a powerful tool for defining regions in a field of similar data. You define how many
clusters (regions) that should be generated from the input data and selected attributes/properties. For example you
can use it to help identify regions where Yield and Soil pH share a similarity. This tool is sometimes used to help
identify management zones.
Select Cluster Attributes/Properties
Cluster Analysis Settings
How to generate a cluster analysis dataset
Comparison Analysis
This analysis function is an extremely powerful tool for showing relationships between all the various types of data that
you have in your system. It allows you to select a dataset, such as yield data and compare it by soil type, pH values,
etc. You can even perform this function in batch to analysis results across all your fields, farms, years, etc. An example
would be to compare Yield and Moisture values by Field and Soil Type. It can also be run across multiple projects.
Select Datasets for Comparison
Select Result Attribute(s) to Output
Select Result Grouping
Define Attribute Value Ranges
Analysis Report Options
How to generate comparison results
Batch Related Topics
Select Reference Dataset
Select Related Data Filter
Select Fixed Value
74
Data Analysis and Modification
How to run a batch comparison analysis
Correlation Analysis
This analysis function provides the ability to help determine what variables that influence your crop production may
have a positive, negative, or no affect at all on each other. An example you may want to see what the historical affect
of different soil properties like pH, OM, or CEC may be on yield in your fields over all the years that you have been
collecting data. You may find that pH and CEC have no relationship at all but OM has a high correlation meaning as its
value increases so do yield levels and vice versa. This function can be performed in batch or even across multiple
projects.
Select Correlation Attributes
How to generate correlation results
Equation Based Analysis
This analysis function allows you to write your own equations to apply to the data in your system. For example, you
can enter in equations from your state for fertilizer recommendations using inputs such as yield values, soil test result
values, soil type, etc. Equations can also be run in batch to generate results for multiple datasets at one time, so you
can write a prescription equation and then run it against all your fields at once using the batch option.
Define Output Attribute
Set Analysis Result Type(s)
Select Analysis Input Datasets
Define Result Equation(s)
Add/Edit Equation Variables and Spatial Functions
Understanding Equation Formatting
How to write an analysis equation
Multi-Year Averages Analysis
This analysis function takes multiple years of data and combines them into one result dataset that is an averaged
equivalent of all the datasets that are input. You can also select to have the attributes normalized so as to allow for
proper averaging and comparison of datasets from different products, such as Corn and Soybean yield data which is
directly comparable since the yield scale of these products are not the same, thus not directly comparable. This
function is very useful for taking many years of yield data and combining them into one dataset that is easier top work
with for input into other analysis functions and also can show overall trends that exist year after year. It can also be run
in batch.
Aggregate Options
How to generate a Multi-Year averages dataset
NDVI Analysis
This analysis function creates an NDVI dataset set from an NIR image. NDVI stands for Normalized Difference
Vegetative Index and is an indicator of a crops health. Healthy crops will have a high NDVI value. Bare soil, rocks, etc
will have NDVI values near zero. Clouds, water, and snow will have negative NDVI values. Raw NIR data, or Vigor as
it is often referred to, is also generated using this analysis function.
NDVI Settings
How to generate an NDVI dataset
Profit/Loss Analysis
This analysis function uses the Financial Tracking entries you have made to generate a profit/loss dataset for a field at
a time. Three attributes are created; Expenses, Income, and Profit/Loss. The results will not be as accurate as the
totals or results you get from the Financial Tracking Report though due to the strictly spatial nature of this analysis and
the gridding that occurs, but it will still reflect financial trends in your fields that can be used to make adjustments to
your operation or as an input into the equation analysis function for further analysis. This function can also be run in
batch.
Financial Tracking
How to generate a Profit/Loss dataset
Terrain Analysis
75
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
This analysis function uses the 3D grid that is used to display the 3D terrain view to generate slope (dimensionless),
gradient direction (degrees), stream power, etc attributes for a selected field. These results can then be used as an
input into the equation analysis function for further analysis. This function can also be run in batch.
How to generate a terrain analysis dataset.
Multi-Project Analysis (ADVANCED)
Multi-Project Analysis provides a very powerful tool for performing certain analysis functions over separate projects,
which have no link to each other. This is powerful because it provides a means for "pooling" of data from many
growers for example across a county or even an entire state for example. This ability would allow you to compare the
yield performance of a certain hybrid/variety across multiple growers in a region, without compromising the privacy of a
specific growers detailed information. You can also perform a correlation to see if there maybe was a correlation
between yield levels and pH values for a group of growers in a region.
Select a topic below on multi-project analysis:
Select Projects to Analyze
Select Reference Dataset
Select Related Data Filter
Select Data Filters
Correlation Analysis
This analysis function provides the ability to help determine what variables that influence your crop production may
have a positive, negative, or no affect at all. An example you may want to see what the historical affect of different soil
properties like pH, OM, or CEC may be on yield in your fields over all the years that you have been collecting data.
You may find that pH and CEC have no relationship at all but OM has a high correlation meaning as its value
increases so do yield levels and vice versa.
Select Analysis Input Datasets
Select Correlation Attributes
How to generate correlation results.
Comparison Analysis
This analysis function is an extremely powerful tool for showing relationships between all the various types of data that
you have in your system. It allows you to select a dataset, such as yield data and compare it by soil type, pH values,
etc.
Select Datasets for Comparison
Select Result Attribute(s) to Output
Select Result Grouping
Define Attribute Value Ranges
Analysis Report Options
How to generate comparison results
Spatial Data Finder (ADVANCED)
The Spatial Data Finder provides a tool for finding data in the system that you would like to map without having to
manually select it from the management tree or the calendar view. You define a custom filter, similar to what you would
do for a report, that allows you to search the system for any spatial data that meets your selected filters. For example
you can setup a filter that finds all Grain Harvest data of a specific product, such as Corn. The result is that you get an
output that generates one or more layers (based on how you select to group the results) in a new map or the currently
active map.
Select a topic below on finding spatial data:
Spatial Filter Type Selection
Select Spatial Filter Items
Spatial Filter Results
How to search for spatial data using the Spatial Data Finder
76
Data Analysis and Modification
Financial Tracking
The software allows you to enter financial values to track your expenses and income to provide detailed information
such as total and average expenses for performing certain operations and profit/loss information. We call this type of
analysis Financial Tracking. Financial Tracking entries can be used to generate a Financial Tracking Report,
Profit/Loss datasets (ADVANCED Only), or calculated expense, income, and profit/loss attributes for your datasets.
In Basic, you can only create/edit Simple Expense/Income entries. These entries can be added to Products,
Operational Instances, or Datasets from the management tree. They can also be added via the Management Item
Editor for Products and Operational Instances. Simple Expense/Income entries are all based on Money PER type
entries so money/bag or money/gallon for example.
In Advanced, you can create/edit Simple and Calculated Expense/Income Entries. Calculated entries are different in
that they are often based on multiple values and aren't normally entered as money PER entries. Advanced users also
have access to the Financial Tracking Tree and also Profit/Loss Analysis that generates a single analysis result
dataset for all the expense/income entries for a single year.
Select one of the topics below on Financial Tracking:
Simple Expense/Income Entries
About the Financial Entries Tree (ADVANCED)
Select Expense/Income Type
Expense/Income Info (ADVANCED)
Expense/Income Entry (ADVANCED)
Profit/Loss Report Options
Analysis Wizard (ADVANCED)
How to enter Financial Tracking entries
How to generate a Financial Tracking report
How to generate a Profit/Loss dataset (ADVANCED).
Booklet Printing (ADVANCED)
This option is available to Advanced users only. It allows you to build up a booklet of results that normally you would
have to print or export manually for each type of output that you wanted to generate. Booklet Printing streamlines and
organizes this task and allows you to build a booklet template that can be run to automatically generate all your
desired results in one result booklet than can be printed or saved to HTML.
The Booklet Printing option is unique because it allows you to generate a complete solution that includes a title page,
table of contents, reports, charts, maps, and analysis results. Without this option all these results would require many
separate steps that would have to be manually configured and run individually which could be very time consuming
and lead to possible errors in terms of including the proper data between all the results you would manually be
generating. Booklets all help insure consistency in the results you are generating.
Select one of the following topics on Booklet Printing:
Booklet Type Selection
Booklet Item Selection
77
Importing/Exporting Data and Setup Information
Importing Data
The software provides a number of import options. You can import image, ESRI Shape, ASCII text files, and other into
the management system.
There are a number of sources for spatial data to import into the system, some free and others fee based. Your local
input supplier may already have files that have been collected for your fields that they can provide you to import into
the system.
Select a topic below on importing data into the system:
Image Files
Image files in a BMP, JPEG, JPEG2000, GIF, MrSID, PNG, WMF, TIFF, or GeoTIFF format can be imported into the
system and manually geo-referenced, if needed. Imported images can be managed in the Management Tree or stored
as background images for maps. World files containing geo-referencing for the import image are also supported, if
available, and will be automatically loaded if they are present in the same location as the image file you are importing.
MrSid and JPEG2000 are image formats used in the GIS industry to compress, manage, and transfer very large image
files, at very high resolutions. These files can be imported into the system, but by doing so they will not be compressed
any longer, which means they can take up large amounts of storage space on your hard drive. Make sure that when
importing these formats that you either use one of the available clipping options when importing or try to acquire
images located around your fields specifically and not county wide images for example. Some files may not import,
such as an image of an entire county, if they are to large because your computer may not have enough available
memory or storage to open and save the file. Also, these formats can contain geo-referencing information like a
GeoTIFF but it is not required. If it does not have the geo-referencing you will be required to geo-reference the image
the same as you would when importing a regular image file.
Image Geo-reference
How to geo-reference an Image
Image Clipping Options
Manually Clip Image
Image Import Settings
Set Background
Download Imagery from Internet...
Allows the automatic downloading and import of color aerial images from the internet. You must have an internet
connection to use this feature and you should have either automatic, frozen, or set boundaries for fields in your system
to get the best possible images available. The download process is very simple and allows you to select the fields that
you wish to download images for via a filter and then where you want the images stored in the system and whether or
not you would like them to clip to your frozen field boundaries. Images can also be downloaded from the internet by
entering a manual Latitude/Longitude or by selecting entering a location name.
NOTE: No warranty or guarantee of imagery quality or availability is made when using this feature.
Downloaded imagery is made available for the users own private use only and is not to be used for resale or
commercial purposes.
Internet Imagery Download Options
How to download imagery from the internet.
Set Background
Download Soil Survey Data from Internet (US Only)...
Allows the automatic download and import of soil survey data from the USDA via the internet. You must have an
internet connection to use this feature and you must have either an automatic, frozen, or set field boundary for your
fields in order to download the soil survey information. The available data may vary from region to region but as much
technical detail as is available is downloaded for the soils that go with your fields.
NOTE: No warranty or guarantee of quality or availability is made when using this feature.
How to Download Soil Survey Data from the Internet
Soil Survey Clipping Options
Spatial Files
79
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
ESRI Shape, MapInfo MID/MIF, DEM, BIL(NED), and TIGER (general data or county subdivisions) files can be
imported into the system and displayed in the Management Tree as well as mapped, or stored as backgrounds for
maps.
Import Preview
Select Import Type
Select Column Attributes
TIGER Data Options
How to import an ESRI Shape, MapInfo Mid/Mif, DEM, BIL(NED), or TIGER file.
ASCII Text Files
ASCII text files can be imported into the system and displayed in the Management Tree as well as mapped.
Text Import Format
Select Lat/Lon
Import Preview
Select Import Type
Select Column Attributes
How to import an ASCII text file.
Non-Spatial File (Lab Results)...
Non-spatial ASCII text files can be imported into the system and linked to spatial datasets that have already been
read into or created in the system. The most common example of non-spatial data that you would want to import is soil
sample lab results. Weather data might also be another example of data that doesn't have spatial references with it but
that you want to link to spatial datasets that you have such as a field area.
Text Import Format
Select Field Name Column
Assign Import Data by Field Names
Select Linking Attribute
Select Column Attributes
How to import non-spatial data(i.e. Soil Lab Results).
Management Items (Products)...
Specifically supported file formats that contain reference item lists, such as AgriDNA XML files or generic ASCII text
files containing lists of items and their properties can be imported using this import wizard. Common uses of this import
would be to import Product, Vehicle, or Implement lists. The Ag Leader Management Setup File (*.MSF) is also
supported for import of management items such as Grower/Farm/Field.
Select Import Columns
Management Item Import Preview
Using a Template
The software allows you to use import templates that have the column attributes already defined for a specific file type
and format. You can save a template when importing data for the first time and then use the template the next time you
import data of the same type and format.
Import Template
How to import data using a template.
Exporting Data
The software provides a number of options for exporting data. You can export data as an image, ESRI Shape, KML,
ASCII text, etc. Not all types listed above are available when exporting some selections from the Management Tree or
the current map. Exporting can also be performed from within all dataset editors.
NOTE: Device Setup should be used to export when you want to export multiple files or a complete setup for a
supported display/monitor. Export is more provided as a general tool for exporting files in general formats or when only
single files are needed to be exported. Jobs/Tasks can also be used to export to displays/monitors and should be used
80
Importing/Exporting Data and Setup Information
when you want to plan and track specific field operations. See Device Setup and About Jobs and Tasks for more
information.
Select an Export Method
Device Setup
Select a Display File Format to Export to
Select a Generic File Format to Export to
Export Settings
Select a topic below on exporting data from the system:
Image Files
Mapped data can be exported as an image file in a bitmap, JPEG, GIF, PNG, or TIFF format. You can export an image
from the management tree or the current map. If you export an image from the management tree the resulting image
will be exported in an un-projected state. If the current map is exported, all its layers will be used to create the image
file and the image will look just like the map was displayed.
Mapped data can also be exported as a GeoTIFF image file. The exported GeoTIFF file contains spatial reference
information that will allow other programs that support GeoTIFF’s to map the image file without requiring
georeferencing information from you. If you export a GeoTIFF from the management tree the resulting image will be
exported in WGS84 Lat/Lon. If the current map is exported, all its layers will be used to create the image file and the
GeoTIFF will be exported in the current projection that the map was set to.
How to export a bitmap or other image file type.
Spatial Files
Selected data in the Management Tree or the current map can be exported as an ESRI Shape file. Not all selections in
the Management Tree or the current map can be exported as a Shape file. The attribute and properties that are
exported can also be customized and export templates can be created for common exports and to speed up exporting.
How to export an ESRI Shape file.
Text Files
Selected data in the Management Tree or the current map can be exported as an ASCII text file. Not all selections in
the Management Tree or the current map can be exported as an ACSII text file. . The attribute and properties that are
exported can also be customized and export templates can be created for common exports and to speed up exporting.
How to export an ASCII text file.
Ag Leader Basic or Ag Leader Advanced Files
Only YLD file based yield data can be exported as an Ag Leader Basic or Advanced file.
How to export an Ag Leader Basic or Advanced format file.
Boundary Files
Any items at or below the Field level can be selected for export as a boundary file. The format of the export file can be
an ESRI Shape, KML, ASCII text, IBY boundary files for the Ag Leader Insight display, or BDY boundary file for use in
the Ag Leader PF3000 or PF3000 Pro. Boundary files can also be exported from the Boundary Edit dialog.
Navigation Files
Navigation datasets that are selected in the Management Tree or the current map can be exported as either an ESRI
Shape, KML, ASCII text, or PFN navigation file for use in the Ag Leader PF3000 or PF3000 Pro. Navigation files can
also be exported from the Navigation Edit dialog.
Prescription Files - Single and Multiple Layer
Prescription datasets that are selected in the Management Tree or the current map can be exported as ESRI Shape,
KML, ASCII text, ARM prescription files for use with Mid-Tech or Tyler/Case IH AIM systems. TGT prescription files for
use in the Ag Leader PF3000/PF3000 Pro or Insight display, IRX files for use in the Insight display, Case IH/New
Holland Voyager PRD, ENS, or PRE prescriptions, or Flexi-Coil PRE prescription files. Prescriptions for the
AGCO/AGCHEM FALCON system can be exported as TIF or TRF/INI file(s). Prescription files can also be exported
from the Prescription Editor dialog.
Single Layer Only
81
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Ag Leader TGT Export Settings
How to export a TGT prescription file.
Voyager Prescription Settings
How to export a Case IH or New Holland Voyager PRD Prescription file.
Single or Multiple Layer
Insight IRX Export Options
How to export an Insight IRX Prescription File
Case IH ENS Export Settings
Flexi-Coil FlexControl/Case IH ADX Export Settings
How to export a Case IH ENS Prescription File.
How to export a Case IH or Flexi-Coil PRE Prescription File.
Guidance Files
Guidance datasets that are selected in the Management Tree or the current map can be exported as either generic
ESRI Shape, KML, ASCII text, GLN guidance file for use with MidTech systems, guidance files for use with Case
IH/New Holland/Trimble Remote Data Logger, guidance files for use with the Trimble AgGPS160/170, and FLD
guidance files for use with the EZ-Guide Plus system(v2.X> firmware). Guidance files can also be exported from the
Guidance Editor dialog.
Marks Files with or without Logged Data
Mark data that is contained in a dataset that is selected in the Management Tree or the current map can be exported
as either an ASCII text, ESRI Shape, KML, or PFN navigation file for use in the Ag Leader PF3000 or PF3000 Pro.
This option is only available when the selected dataset in the Management Tree or the current map contains mark
data. Marks data is exported by itself and not with the data it was collected with such as harvest data.
Export Templates
Export templates can be created in the software for Spatial export types. You can setup the export settings for a
particular file format and then save the settings so that they can be loaded each time you need to export data in the
specific format and formatting.
Device Setup
The software allows you to export a device setup file(s) that can be loaded into your monitor, SMS Mobile, AgFiniti, or
other field device to set up things like Field Names, default calibration values, mark names, etc.
A setup configuration can be created that can contain the following: Growers/Farms/Fields, Resource Tracking Items,
Pests, Drainage Tile (ADVANCED), Products, and Spatial Datasets. These items when added to the setup
configuration can then be exported to various supported monitors and field devices. Setup Configurations can be
saved for exporting to multiple monitor systems, even if the monitors were not made by the same manufacture and use
different file formats. Setup Configurations are generic and thus can be reused independent of what system you
currently are using. Setup Configurations can also be created if different names are needed for different seasons or
different customers for example.
Spatial Data can also be selected for export in the setup configuration using a Year and Operation filter and the
Grower/Farm/Field(s) that are selected in the setup configuration. So once you have picked your Fields you will be
working in, all you have to do is select a Year and then an Operation you have data for and that spatial data can then
be exported in the appropriate file format for the device you have selected to export to. Common examples would be to
pick the Guidance operation to export guidance patterns that can then be used by your field device to provide
guidance in the field or to export variable rate prescription files by picking one of the prescription operations that you
had created prescription data for. Please note that not all Operations that can be selected are supported by all field
devices and their file formats. Device export will only export the spatial data and operations that are supported by the
selected export format and all other spatial data you have in your setup configuration will be ignored.
Support is also available for exporting a device setup to AgFiniti cloud. Ag Leader AGSETUP files can be exported as
well as data for use in AgFiniti Map View or syncing with AgFiniti Mobile. Exporting AGSETUP files allows you to place
your setup file in the cloud where it can be downloaded by other users and displays that have access to your AgFiniti
account. This feature requires an AgFiniti Essentials license to function. Exporting processed/created data for use in
Map View allows you to view your SMS data in any web browser that supports AgFiniti and as long as you have a
current SMS Maintenance license. You can also sync this data to AgFiniti Mobile if you have an AgFiniti Essentials
license.
82
Importing/Exporting Data and Setup Information
When creating and exporting a device setup for SMS Mobile there are a number of exceptions to the normal rules for a
Setup Configuration. First is that Farm and Field backgrounds that have been set will automatically export based of the
Farms and Fields you select to export and you can not disable this, they always export. Second is that all Products
export to SMS Mobile, you don't have to custom select Products to export they will all be exported. Third is that all
attributes and properties are exported to SMS Mobile, including user created ones. The last exception is that all usercreated or altered Operations are exported automatically.
Select a topic below on Device Setup:
Device Setup Utility
Add/Edit Setup Configuration - Setup Info
Add/Edit Setup Configuration - Fields Setup
Add/Edit Setup Configuration - Resource Tracking Setup
Add/Edit Setup Configuration - Pest Setup
Add/Edit Setup Configuration - Drainage Tile
Add/Edit Setup Configuration - Products Setup
Add/Edit Setup Configuration - Spatial Data Setup
Select Display to Export to
How to create and export a Device Setup.
83
Printing (Reports, Charts, Map Layouts, etc)
Printing
The software provides a number of methods for printing out the data that you have read into the management system.
There are five main types of printing that you can perform: Screen prints, Report printouts, Scouting reports, Charts,
and Map printouts.
Select one of the following topics to see more information on printing in the software:
Printing Screen Information
The software provides the option to print information that is displayed on the screen in a number of areas. In general
always look under the File Menu for your print options for the current view or document that is active or right click in a
document window to see its print or save options, if any are available.
How to print the Map Window summary information.
How to print the query results information.
How to print the Summary Window Information.
Printing General Reports
The software allows you to print summary reports for data that is stored in the management system. Reports can even
be generated for data that is imported and was not collected by your equipment. You have the option to set filters for
each report type that is available. Reports can even be output as an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) files for use
on the Internet.
Report Type Selection
Report Options
How to print a report.
How to create a custom report
Printing Scouting Reports
The software allows you to generate a special report for any data you have collected or created as a Scouting
operation. This report is special because it combines aspects of a normal report with a print layout to provide summary
data as well as map data for your scouting data. It is also unique in that the general formatting of the report is fixed in
its design but you can customize some of the content of the summary, what operations to display, and even colors for
formatting the look of the report. Two types of report can be generated; a Condensed Scouting Report or a Detailed
Scouting report. The condensed version is designed to generate a minimal number of pages with only key information
while the detailed version will provide multiple pages with more detail on each of the scouting operations you collected
data for.
Select a Scouting Report Type
Select Report Content Settings
Select Report Formatting Settings
Scouting Report Preview
Printing Charts
The software allows you to print charts of both attribute and property data. You can generate various types of bar and
pie charts, which ever best fits your visualization needs. Charts can either be printed with a printer or saved as image
files.
Chart Type Selection
Chart Options
How to print a chart.
How to create a custom chart
Printing Map Layouts
The software provides a preview of the printout that will be created when one of the print layer/map options is selected.
You can alter the dimensions, location, and properties of the default data boxes on these layouts. The Custom Layout
selection allows you to save any changes to existing layouts or create new layouts.
85
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Select one of the following links to see a description of each of the different types of layouts:
Single or Multi-Layer Layout
How to print a map of the current layer.
How to print a map of all layers.
Current Map Layout
How to print the current map.
Custom Layout
How to print a custom map.
86
Data Backup, Transfer, and Maintenance
Backing up and Restoring Data
The software provides you the ability to create a backup copy of all the data and settings that you have stored in the
system. Backup files can then be restored at a latter date to go back to a previous state of your data or to recover data
that may have been lost.
Backup
This feature creates a compressed backup of all the data, archived files, and settings that are stored in your Data
directory. It is recommended that you periodically create backups of your system to protect the data you have loaded
into it and the management settings that you have made. Advanced allows you to create backups for all your projects,
a single project, or selectively pick specific projects you want to backup at the same time.
Note: Basic users have limited access to project editing or control, and are limited to five. Basic users can
provide a backup that can be restored into Advanced, and vice versa.
How to create a backup of your systems data.
Backup Scheduling...
This feature allows you to define a date/time when a backup of either all your projects or a single project will occur,
unattended. This is extremely useful in situation where you have very large projects and need to have backups occur
overnight when you don't need access to your projects. Your computer must be left on for a scheduled backup to
occur, but the software must be closed. You also do not have to be logged into your computer for the backup to occur,
as the your computer login is required to setup a backup so that the backup can occur without you having to physically
login to your computer.
Schedule Backup
Restore
This feature allows you to select one or more backup files that were previously created, to restore your data, archive
files, and settings to the same state that they were when you created the backup(s).
Note: When you perform a restore in Basic, up to five projects can be restored. Any projects beyond the
first five will be ignored. You can also select to have it replace existing data if you want.
How to restore a system data backup file.
Transfer Settings, Setup Files, Etc.
The transfer options provide a means of sharing various settings and setup files that you have created or modified,
with other users of the software. You can transfer selection lists, properties, attributes, backgrounds, analysis function,
operations, years, operational instances, products, vehicles, implements, containers, operators, legends, print layouts,
import templates, export templates, reports, and charts. If you transfer an item, such as a report or analysis function
that uses an attribute or property that is user-defined the transfer will automatically add the attributes or properties that
you defined and are unique to your system to the transfer list under the appropriate item group. This insures that your
transferred items will function properly on another users system even though they may not have all the same items in
their system that you have.
Transfers can also be used by Advanced users to "sync" items and settings between projects. This means that you
can setup all your custom settings and items in one project, select all the items for transfer, click the Set As Transfer
Project Default button, and now when you open any other project it will check to see if it has the latest transfer loaded
and if not it will ask you if you would like to load the latest transfer. The result is that you can quickly and easily share
your items with all the projects you use, which is extremely useful when you have items that you add that you would
like to add to all your projects for general use.
How to export and import Transfer Information
Transfer Export Dialog
87
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Available Items to Export
Select from the listed settings, files, etc that are available for transfer.
Show Default System Items
Check this option to show all items in the system, including factory defaults. The only time you should need
to transfer factory defaults is if you have altered the defaults and you want to transfer them.
Selected Items to Export
Lists the settings, file, etc that have been selected for transfer.
Set As Transfer Project Default (ADVANCED)
Click this button to set the items that you have chosen for transfer as a global default for all projects in your system.
Each time you open a project it checks to see if it has the latest global transfer that is available. If it does not, then you
will be asked if you would like to load the transfer into the project you are opening or continue on without loading it.
This is very useful for keeping items and settings that you often you or add over time to other projects so that you don't
have to manually create them again or transfer and import them manually.
Transfer Import Dialog
88
Data Backup, Transfer, and Maintenance
Available Items to Import
Lists items that are available for import, but should only list items that have been removed from the Selected Items
tree.
Show Default System Items
Check this option to show all items in the system, including factory defaults. The only time you should need
to transfer factory defaults is if you have altered the defaults and you want to transfer them.
Selected Items to Import
Lists the items that are contained in the selected transfer file for import. You can selectively remove items that you do
not want to import from the transfer file by removing them.
Create New Items if Duplicates Exist
Select this option if you want to create new item entries in your system if duplicates are found between
items in your system and those being imported from the transfer file. This option insures that you don't
overwrite existing items that you may want to keep as is but can also lead to a number of additional
number items being created that could be duplicates of items you already have and really should have just
replaced.
Replace Duplicate Items with Import Items
Select this option if you want to replace any duplicate settings, files, etc that are already in your system
with the ones from the transfer file. Remember that this option will overwrite any existing items in your
system that are the same, so be careful because you will lose the current version of these items in your
system.
Set As Transfer Project Default (ADVANCED)
Click this button to set the items that you have chosen for import as a global default for all projects in your system.
Each time you open a project it checks to see if it has the latest global transfer that is available. If it does not, then you
will be asked if you would like to load the transfer into the project you are opening or continue on without loading it.
This is very useful for keeping items and settings that you often you or add over time to other projects so that you don't
have to manually create them again or transfer and import them manually.
Database Maintenance
89
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
The software uses the ACCESS 2007 database engine to store and manage data in the management system. Due to
the deleting of data, number of datasets (loads) read into the system, and management changes there can be a fair
amount of wasted or unused space in the database which can slow down the performance of the system. To keep the
system performing at a high-level, it is recommended that you use the Compact Files… feature located under the Tool
menu. This function will cleanse your database of unused information that is wasting space. This feature will also
optimize the database to increase performance. It would be good practice to run this feature once a month.
90
How to ...
How to read logged data files into the system.
Follow these steps to read files into the system:
1.
Start the program.
2.
Now go to the FILE menu or the main toolbar and select READ FILE(S)...
3. A dialog will now appear with four options on it for reading files into the software. To read files logged
or created by a supported field display there are two options. The first option is READ FILE(S) FROM A
SUPPORTED FIELD DISPLAY OR MONITOR. The option is selected if there is a green check mark over
the top right corner of the display icon. Once the option is selected, click the START READING FIELD
DISPLAY FILES... button. The second option is DOWNLOAD AND READ FILES FROM AGFINITI CLOUD
SERVICES but this option is only for Ag Leader AGDATA and AGSETUP files currently.
°
The AgFiniti option is only available if you have an AgFiniti account and a File
Transfer license.
4. A dialog will now appear that lists all the companies that the software can read files directly from as
well as the options for searching for or selecting files. Click one of the company names to select it, then in
the list to the right of the buttons a list of supported displays/file formats will be displayed. By default the
SEARCH FOR ALL FILE FORMATS BELOW option should be selected and it is recommended that
generally you leave the selection set to this option. Lastly you can select the search or selection option. By
default the option will be set to search a folder or a directory. You can also manually select files or search
an entire card/drive. Once you have selected your options click the START AUTOMATIC FILE SEARCH...
button.
5. Depending on which search option you selected you will now either be prompted with either a file
selection dialog, a folder/directory dialog, or the drive/card you selected to search will be searched for files
that match your selection.
6. Once the search or selection is completed you will now see a dialog that lists the results or the
search or selection as well as the current settings that will be used to read the selected files. At this point
you can edit the selected files to either add more files or remove files by clicking the EDIT... button to the
right of the list of files. File processing options are provided and if you want to edit them select the
EDIT...button to the right of the listed options. Lastly, there is an ON/OFF button that controls how
management information will be created for the data being read in as well as whether you will see the data
processing settings. it is HIGHLY recommended that you leave this option set to ON.
7. Once you are happy with the selected files to be read in and the various processing settings click the
START PROCESSING SELECTED FILES... button.
8. Now depending on what type of file(s) you selected to read and the options selected, you may be
prompted to enter/set management information or set format specific information that is missing.
°
The following are examples of some formats that will require you enter/select
management information. The CNH Voyager format requires the entry/selection of a
Grower. The Case IH’s and New Holland’s ENS file format contains only Farm and Field
names and requires the creation/selection of a Grower for data from a new monitor. If the
file being read in is an Ag Leader BDY, TGT, or PFN file you will have to enter/select
Grower, Farm, and Field names.
°
The following are examples of formats you have to enter settings for. You must select
an archive data type for all Harvest or Site Verification files from Ag Leader’s YM2000’s and
early firmware versions of the PF3000 as well as all Case IH AFS yield mapping systems.
Newer Ag Leader PF3000 YLD’s provide the information to auto-detect the type when read
in. Another example is for the CNH Voyager 2 file format you will be asked to select whether
or not you want to also read in addition files such as field boundaries, guidance files, etc
when the logged data is read in.
9. The file(s) will now be read into the software. When processing is finished, the data will be selectable
in the Management Tree.
How to migrate your data from Precision Map 2000 or Instant Yield Map Software
Follow these steps to transfer data from Precision Map 2000 or Instant Yield Map Software:
1.
Start the software.
2.
Go to the File Menu and then select Open or select the Open icon from the main toolbar.
3.
The Select Files dialog will now appear on the screen. Click on the Add File(s) button.
4.
The Open dialog will now appear. Now click on the down arrow to the right of the Look In: box. Now select
the location where you installed Precision Map or Instant Yield Map and find the folder that contains the
91
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
serial number of your monitor(s). This folder will contain all the YLD files that you have read into Precision
Map 2000 or Instant Yield Map for that monitor. Select all the files that you would like to read in and then
click the Open button.
5.
You will now return to the Select Files dialog. The files to be loaded into the system will now be listed in the
dialog. If all the selected files are from the same year, Grower, Farm, and are of the same Operation Type
and you would like to read the files in quicker, you can select the Batch Process Files item. If you are ready
to continue and load these files, click the Next> button and follow the rest of the directions for reading files
into the system.
Note:
The same procedure as above should be used to transfer data from other mapping software programs that you have
been using that kept an archived YLD file. Locate the YLD files within the program and follow the steps detailed above.
How to import Greenstar data.
Greenstar data can be imported either directly from the GSY files that are logged or via an ASCII text file that can be
exported from JDMap or JDOffice and then imported into the software using a template. Reading directly from the
original GSY files is recommended.
Follow these steps to import Greenstar data into the system:
1.
See How to read logged data files into the system.
OR
1.
Go to the File menu and select Import, then Using a Template.
2.
The Select Template dialog will now appear. Click the Browse button for Template File and then select the
Greenstar.imt file in the Open dialog and click Open.
3.
Click the Browse button for Import File and select the Greenstar ASCII text data file that was exported from
your software. Click Open.
4.
Select a Data Type and a Management Type for the imported data. Select Grain Harvest for the Data Type if
the data being imported in yield data. Select Add to Management Hierarchy for the management type. Click
Next> once you make these selections.
5.
The attribute columns should all be set and ready to continue. Make sure that there is data for all the
columns that are set and that they match properly. Click Next> when done.
6.
Select the management information for the imported data then click Next>.
7.
Click Finish.
How to reprocess data.
Follow these steps to reprocess load data that has already been read into the system:
1.
Select the load(s) that you would like to reprocess from the Management Tree, either by selecting the
Operation Instance to select all the loads below it or selecting an individual load(s).
2.
Click the right mouse button and select Reprocess Data…from the menu that pops up.
3.
A dialog with a settings tab(s) will now appear, depending on what settings can be reprocessed for the
selected data. Make the settings changes that you would like applied to the selected data and then click OK.
4.
If more than one file contains data for the selected loads then the settings dialog will reappear for each file.
Repeat Step 3) for each of these dialogs.
5.
Once all the files have been set, the software will begin reprocessing the load data based on your edited
settings.
6.
Reselect the reprocessed data from the Management Tree to see the effects of the changes that were
made.
Note: Currently only YLD files support reprocessing of data. All other formats can only be reprocessed through the
Reprocess File(s) functionality.
How to set your map projection.
Follow these steps to set the default map projection for all maps that made:
92
1.
To create a more accurate map of your data you need to select a special projection that is specific to the
area you farm, click on a Grower in the Management Tree.
2.
Click the right mouse button and select Edit Item.
3.
Click on the Projection Tab.
4.
Click the down arrow in the box under Datum and select NAD83 for example for the United States.
How to ...
5.
Click the down arrow in the box under Projection and select the state and region description that best fits the
area you farm.
6.
Click OK. Any new maps you make will now reflect this change.
Note: Reference maps showing UTM zones for the entire world and State Plane regions for the United States are
available by clicking the Help button on the Projection tab.
Using the Management Tree
The Management Tree allows you to quickly and easily find information that you would like to view.
The following steps describe how to use the Management Tree to find information that you are looking for:
1.
Click on a Grower name. A map of all the farm boundaries (If defined) and fields associated with the Farm
and Grower should appear in the Preview Window (if it is active). Summary information should also appear
in the summary window showing all the Farms and Fields that are associated with the Grower. A map can
now be created/added to the Map Window as a boundary layer.
2.
To proceed down in the tree, double-click the left mouse button on the Grower name. The tree will expand to
show all the Farms associated with the Grower. The Management Tree will automatically expand to the next
level that has multiple entries, so if all the following levels down to the Load level only have one entry then
the tree will expand all the way down to that level. The Summary Window will now display a list of Fields
associated with the Farm and the Years that data is available. Click on a specific Farm to see a boundary
map of the Farm (if defined) and all the Fields associated with the Grower and Farm in the Preview Window,
if it is active. Double-click on a Farm to expand it and see a list of the fields associated with it. A map can
now be created/added to the Map Window as a boundary layer.
3.
Now double-click the left mouse button on a Farm and/or click on a Field. A boundary map for the field
should now be displayed in the Preview Window (if there is spatial data for that field). The Summary Window
should now display the Years and Operation Types that data is available for the selected field. A map can
now be created/added to the Map Window as a boundary layer.
4.
Next, double-click the left mouse button on a Field name and/or click on a Year. The tree will now expand to
show a list of all the Years that data is available for the field, or expand to the next level with multiple entries.
The same boundary map as above should still be visible in the Preview Window (if active). The Summary
Window will now display the Operation Types that data has been collected for in that Year and the
Crop/Products that were used. A map can now be created/added to the Map Window as a boundary layer.
5.
Now double-click the left mouse button on a Year and/or click on an Operation Type. The tree will now
expand to show a list of all the Operation Types that data is available for that Year or expand to the next
level with multiple entries. The same boundary map as above should still be visible in the Preview Window (if
active). The Summary Window will now display the Crops/Products and the Operational Instances that data
is available for. A map can now be created/added to the Map Window as a boundary layer.
6.
Next, double-click the left mouse button on the Operation Type and/or click on a Crop/Product. The tree will
now expand to show a list of all the Crops/Products that data is available for or expand to the next level with
multiple entries. A default data map should now be displayed if spatial data is available in the Preview
Window, if active. The Summary Window should now display field summary information for the selection if
available. A data map can now be created/added to the Map Window.
7.
Now double-click the left mouse button on the Crop/Product and/or click on an Operational Instance. A
default data map should now be displayed if spatial data is available in the Preview Window (if active). The
Summary Window will now display load summary information for all the loads that data is available for. A
data map can now be created/added to the Map Window.
8.
Lastly, double click the left mouse button on the Operational Instance and/or click on a Load. A default data
map should now be displayed for the selected Load in the Preview Window, if active. The Summary Window
will display the summary information for the selected load. A data map of the selected load can now be
created/added to the Map Window. You have now reached the bottom level of the Management Tree
hierarchy.
Note: All levels in the Management Tree that have a (+) or (-) next to then can be expanded or compressed. Doubleclick on the item with the left mouse button to do this.
Hint: If you are having trouble finding information you want because there is to much information shown in your
Management Tree then you should try using the Management Tree Filter option to reduce the items that are displayed
in your Management Tree. Click the Filter icon in the Management Tree Toolbar or right click your mouse in the
Management Tree window and select the Management Tree Filter option. A filter dialog should now appear that lets
you pick specific management items to include data from in your Management Tree. In addition or on its own you can
also set a date range to include data from. Once you have selected your filter items, select OK and your Management
Tree should not be updated to only show the items that match the filter items that you set. A common example would
be to set the filter to a specific Year you want to see data for or a specific Operation or Product.
Using the Preview Window
93
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
The following steps outline a general procedure for using the Preview Window:
1.
Start the software.
2.
Make a selection(s) in the Management Tree.
3.
If the Preview Window is not visible by default, it is located below the Management Tree, then select View
from the main menu then click Preview Window. The Preview Window should now be displayed.
4.
If spatial data is available for the selection(s), then a map of the data should be visible in the Preview
Window. The map that is displayed will depend on the level at which you have made your selection in the
Management Tree. If you selected any level above Crop/Product then you will see a boundary map for the
selection(s), if you have selected the Crop/Product level or a lower level then you will see a default data map
for the selection(s).
5.
If you would like to create or add to a map then click on the appropriate button at the top of the Preview
Window or click on the appropriate icon in the main toolbar.
Note: The Preview Window can not be zoomed, unless you have a wheel-type mouse, or edited. It can however be
undocked from its default location, resized, or turned off.
Using the Calendar View. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to use the Calendar View:
1.
Click the Calendar View Tab in the Main Window. The Tab should switch and you will now see a calendar
displayed where the Management Tree was previously.
2.
The area above the calendar displays the available tools for working with the calendar. The current date
should be displayed in a selection in the upper right corner of the window.
3.
Adjust the date to a time when you know you have logged data, such as the month and year that you have
harvested with a yield monitor and GPS receiver. The date can be changed by selecting the number you
want to edit and either typing in a number or using the arrow keys on the keyboard to increment the values.
Additionally, you can select the down arrow beside the date values and a small calendar will appear that you
can use to select a new date.
4.
Once you find a date range with spatial data in it, you will see a gray bar(s) with a Year/Product/Operation
based name. These bars are called Calendar Events and are based on a grouping filter that can be set to
group data into events of your choosing.
5.
Left click on one of the gray boxes; it should then turn blue to indicate it is selected. The Summary Window
should now update with a summary of the selected calendar event. This summary view is different than
other summaries in that it lists different management items together and provides a sum of the entries at the
bottom. The summary can also be printed.
6.
In addition to the Summary, displaying the Preview Map should display all the data for the selected calendar
event, which can then be mapped. This is an excellent way to make a quick map of all your Soybean or Corn
harvest data, for example, with one button press.
7.
You can also change the resolution of the calendar between a Month, Week, and Day View for better
resolution of the calendar view. On the Day View, Daily Stats/Info is also available that summarizes the data
that was collected on that day, but no map will be displayed.
8.
Two filter and grouping buttons are available above the calendar view:


9.
The first filter is a standard Data Filter that limits the data that can be viewed in the calendar, such
as only displaying data from a certain Grower or an Operation.
The second button is for selecting the calendar event grouping. This allows you to organize how
the calendar will group the data it displays. For example, you could set the grouping to display
events by Operator, Field, and Product or Vehicle, Field, and Operation. You are only limited by
the management items that are in the system and the properties associated with those
management items.
A print button is also provided in the Calendar View that will print the current calendar that is displayed, and
in the format that it is displayed.
10. Notes can also be added to a date on the calendar by selecting a day in the calendar, which should then
highlight at the top in blue, click the right mouse button, and select the Add Event... function. This will allow
you to add text notes that will only be available in the calendar, but provides yet another way for you to
document your operational activities.
11. Lastly, you can select to view more detailed information on a calendar event by double-clicking with the left
mouse button on a calendar event bar or by clicking your right mouse button with a bar selected and
selecting View/Edit Event... from the menu that appears. This will bring up the View Event dialog which will
display a tree of all the management items and datasets that make up the selected event. Most
management items can even be edited from this view, except for Farm and Field.
How to make a map
94
How to ...
Follow these steps to create a map:
1.
Start the program.
2.
Select an item from the Management Tree that you would like to make a map of. Items in the tree displayed
in a bold font contain GPS/spatial data that can be mapped.
3.
If the Preview Window is open, then a map of the selected item should be displayed in the window.
4.
Click on the Create New Map Button or Icon.
5.
A new map containing the data shown in the Preview window, and selected in the management tree, will
now be created and shown in the Map window.
How to Add a Layer to a Map.
Follow these steps to add a data layer to the current map:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
2.
Now select another dataset or use the same one that was used to create the map in the previous step from
the Management Tree.
3.
Click the Add to Current Map>> button above the Preview Window or go to the Map menu and select Add
Selection to Map.
4.
The new layer was added to the Layer Window as the top layer. It will be represented as a button with a "1"
next to the name and the button will have a red outline around it indicating that it is the current layer. The
first layer that was used to create the map will now be located at the bottom of the Layer Window and have a
"2" labeled on the button next to the name.
5.
You now have two layers in the map. Click on the layer button for a layer in the Layer Window to switch to
that layer and display its options and legend. Right-click on a layer button to see other options for the layer
or layers such as rename, change position, and remove layer.
1.
If you would like to make a copy of a layer that is already open in the active map, click your right mouse
button over the layer button for the layer to be copied or click the Layer Display Options button on the active
layer display.
2.
From the menu that appears select Copy Layer and Add to Map.
3.
A copy of the layer will now be added to the Layer Window.
Or
Note: For best results when working with layers, set overlaying layers so that they can be identified from the other
layers. Do this by setting colors, map type, and transparency different for each layer so that you can tell layers apart. If
this is not possible then the multi-layer query feature can provide meaningful numerical information when visually you
can not tell the layers apart.
How to display the 3D Terrain View. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to display the 3D Terrain View:
1.
Create a new map from a selection in the management tree.
2.
Now select the Hide/Show 3D View button on the Map Toolbar or select Map from the main menu and then
Hide/Show 3D View.
3.
Your map should now switch into 3D Terrain View. Various tools are provided for the manipulation of the 3D
view such as the Rotate and Reset Map Rotation options in addition to the fact that all the zoom and pan
tools are also still functional.
4.
You can toggle back and forth between the 3D and 3D views by selecting the Hide/Show 3D View option.
5.
The 3D Terrain View can be printed or saved as an image just like a normal 2D map.
NOTES: Tooltips do still work in 3D Terrain View, but depending on the rotation you may see some offset
in where the you think your cursor is located on the 3D view and what tooltip value appears. This is due to
the viewing angle you have the map rotated to. Also, query does not work when in 3D Terrain view.
TIPS: If your 3D terrain View doesn't look realistic, has obvious errors in it, or doesn't show enough
variation (your ground is fairly flat) there are options for improving the display in 3D.

The 3D grid surface that is used to display the 3D Terrain View is built by default as an average
of all the data that you read into the system that contains the required attributes for building a 3D
grid. Any data read from an Ag Leader, Case IH, or New Holland monitor will meet these criteria.
If you have access to higher accuracy position data, like from an autosteer system, you can
import position and elevation data from to generate a new 3D grid surface using the Regenerate
3D Grid. The Regenerate 3D Grid Batch Command, which may actually be easier for selecting
multiple datasets. Once you have regenerated the 3D Grid, remap the data in question and view
it in 3D to see if the terrain view is improved.
95
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual



If for some reason you can fix the problem by filtering out a few datasets from the 3D grid, you
can apply a more permanent filter to your data. Add a Simple Analysis Filter to your dataset(s)
that contain bad elevation data. Add this filter for the Elevation attribute and make sure to set the
MIN and MAX values for the filter to ones that best fit the real range of your data, like 800 to
1000 ft. Once you have filtered your data use the Regenerate 3D Grid feature (either on
management tree selections or via batch command) and remake your map and check the 3D
Terrain View.
If you can't get acceptable results with of these options or you would prefer more accurate data
then you can import a DEM (Digital Elevation Model) and set this imported data as the 3D Grid.
Import your DEM data into the Management Tree. Then select the DEM dataset in the tree, click
the right mouse button and then select Set 3D Grid. Remake your map and you should now see
a new terrain view that uses the DEM dataset for the 3D grid surface. (DEM's are not useful for
mapping and are only intended for import and setting a 3D grid and not anything else.)
Lastly, if your terrain is fairly flat (lets say around 10 ft or less of elevation change across your
field) the 3D Terrain View by default will provide little use because your map will appear
relatively flat. But there is a display option that you can set to magnify elevation changes across
your field so that you can see a more useful 3D Terrain View. Just because you don't have hilly
or sloping group does not mean that small elevation changes across your field aren't causing
crop production issues. To scale your elevation data, with your data mapped, click on the Edit
Map Options button on the Map Toolbar or go to the Edit Menu and select Map Options. Then
click on the 3D Map tab and enter a value for the Elevation (Z-Axis) Scale Factor. A scale factor
from 0.1 to 20 can be entered but we would recommend that you start with a value of between 24 to test the result you get. This scale factor can also be set as a default for all new maps by
setting this same setting under General Options and 3D Map.
Using the Layer Window
The Layer Window provides you with direct control of how data is organized and viewed in a map.
The following steps show how to use the Layer Window:
1.
Start the software. Select an item(s) with spatial data (any item whose name is displayed in bold text) from
the Management Tree. Create a map.
2.
The Layer Window should now appear to the right of the Map Window. A button outlined or highlighted with
a color should be located at the top of the window with a text name based on the level at which the selected
data came from in the Management Tree.
3.
You can now select from the available settings and properties for the type of data layer that you created.
This could include the map type such as circle or contour map, what attribute to display, transparency level
for the layer, change the map properties, edit the legend for the current attribute, etc.
4.
You can also place your mouse cursor over the layer button and click the right mouse button to see a menu
of options for displaying the layer. These include the position of the layer in terms of others layers, editing
the layer name, creating a copy of the current layer, and removing the layer from the map.
5.
Now you can adjust the size of the Layer window by placing you mouse cursor over the left or right edge of
the Layer window until you see your cursor change to lines with arrows on each side. Now press and hold
your left mouse button and drag the window to the size that you would like.
6.
Lastly, you can undock the Layer window from its current position and re-dock it next to the Management
Tree window or let it float as its own window. To do this, place your cursor over the two horizontal bars at the
top of the Layer window. Now press and hold your left mouse button and start dragging the Layer window to
the location where you would like to place it. The Layer window will only dock with the left or right side of the
Map window, so if you want to re-dock it drag the window towards one of these sides until your mouse
cursor touches or crosses one of the sides. The Layer window should automatically snap into place and redock with the Map window. You can also double click on the title bar of the Layer Window when it is
undocked to re-dock it in its default location.
How to adjust layer and attribute/property options.
Follow these steps to adjust layer and attribute/property options:
1.
Create a map or add a layer to a map of a selected management item.
2.
Go to the Edit Menu and select Layer Options or click on the Edit Options button in the Layer Window.
3.
The Layer and Attribute/Property Options dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to set options for the
current Layer, Sub-Layers, and the current attribute or property.
4.
You now have the following options that can be set:

96
Layer - Tooltips that will be displayed for each map display type, the results that will be displayed
for queries for each map type, and the labels that will be displayed and their placement.
How to ...
5.

Sub-Layers - Visibility for Marks, Notes and attributes to be displayed for each, tooltips to be
displayed, results to be displayed for queries, and labels to display and their placement.

Attribute/Property - Legend and map display type settings, drawing and display options for
datasets, and grid, contour, clipping settings (Only for attributes).
Once you have made the desired option settings, you can save your settings to apply to other datasets or
only when the current dataset is mapped. The following save options are available:

Layer Settings - Save all Layer and Attribute/Property settings for the current dataset only or for all
datasets of the same operation type, such as Grain Harvest.

Sub-Layer Settings - Save the Sub-Layer settings for the current dataset only or for all datasets of
the same operation type.

Spatial Attribute/Property Settings - Either save the Attribute/Property settings only for current
dataset, all datasets of the same operation type, or save both the Layer and Attribute Settings at
the same time.
Example: If you had a field that you were doing variety comparisons in and you wanted to add a tooltip that
displayed a property you had created for Variety, but you only wanted it to display when you were mapping this
particular field. To do this you would add the Variety property to the list of tooltip attributes/properties to be
displayed, click the Save Layer Settings button on the Layer tab, and select Data Selection Default. Now the added
tooltip property will only display when you map the current dataset. If you wanted all the other datasets of the same
operation, Grain Harvest, to get the same tooltip when mapped then you should select Data Type Default as your
save option.
12. Once you have made your all your desired options settings and saves, click the OK or Apply button to
regenerate the current layer in the map with your settings.
How to edit point data.
Follow these steps to edit point data in the system:
1.
Select an item from the Management Tree and create a map or add to an existing map. Only a Point
(Spatial) type can be edited, so make sure the data display is set to one of these types.
2.
From the Map menu, click Edit Layer… or click on the Edit Layer icon on the Map Toolbar. Note: Only point
data for the current layer can be edited.
3.
The Point Data Edit window will now appear. Use the selection tools in the toolbar to select the points to edit.
4.
You now have the option to either Move the point(s), delete the point(s), or straighten the selected points.
5.
To Move selected points click on the Move Item icon. You can then drag the point(s) to the new desired
location.
6.
To delete selected points click on the Delete Item icon. The points will be removed from the display. Note: If
a whole load is selected to be deleted in your selection area, all the points in the load will not be deleted.
This is because of load references in the map. To delete a whole load select the load in the Management
Tree, click the right mouse button, and select Delete Branch.
7.
Click on the Save button to save the modified dataset to the database.
How to straighten a pass on a point dataset.
Follow these steps to manually straighten GPS point data in a pass:
1.
Select and map a dataset(s) that you would like to straighten GPS points for.
2.
Go to the Edit menu and select Layer or click on the Edit Layer icon on the map toolbar.
3.
The Point Map Editor will now appear.
4.
Now select the points or pass that you would like to straighten using the selection tools.
5.
Once you have made your selection(s), got to the Edit menu on the editor and select Straighten Pass or click
on the Straighten Pass icon on the editor toolbar.
6.
Now draw a line or line segments that represent the new path that the points that are selected should be
placed in. Once you have drawn the new path, click the right mouse button to display the straightened data
points.
7.
The Straighten Pass tool can continue to be used as along as the points are selected so that you can get the
points straightened exactly as you desire.
8.
Once you have made the desired changes click the SAVE button to save the new point position.
How to edit a legend.
Follow these steps to edit a legend in the system:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
97
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
2.
Go to the Map menu and select Edit Legend or click on the Edit Legend button in the upper right hand
corner above the Legend Window in the Layer Window.
3.
The Edit Legend dialog will now appear. Select the options that you would like to change and make your
changes. To edit range values click on the cell that contains the range to be edited and type in the new
value. The software will provide feedback if the entered value is not valid. To change the color for a range,
double-click on the color you want to change and the Color Selection dialog will appear. Make your selection
and click OK.
4.
Once you have made the desired changes to the legend, you can either apply the change or save the edited
legend and set it as a default. If you would like to save the legend, click the Save button, enter a name for
the legend or select a legend from the list to replace and then click the OK button. If you would also like to
save the legend as a default make your selection in the Default Selections area before clicking OK.
5.
Now click the OK button on the Edit Legend dialog to return to the main map and view the edited legend.
How to freeze a boundary.
Follow these steps to set a boundary for the Spatial Sorter and also to prevent the adding of more area to the
boundary:
1.
Select a Field from the Management Tree that you would like to freeze the boundary for. You can also select
at the Grower and Farm levels to freeze all the Field Boundaries below the selection. Batch Freezing of
multiple Growers and Farms can also be done through the Batch Command Utility.
2.
The boundary area map should appear in the preview window. If the boundary is representative of the actual
field area and is complete, click the right mouse button with your cursor positioned inside the Management
Tree Window. Select Freeze Boundary.
3.
The boundary in the Preview Window should be replaced with a new boundary that has a black border
around its edges and also around internal regions that show up as holes. This boundary can now be edited
by creating a map of it and selecting Edit Layer from the Map menu or the Edit Layer icon from the Map
Window Toolbar.
Note: The frozen boundary will not automatically update if new data from that field is read into the system. If this is the
case or you would like to return to the automatic boundary then select the Field and then the Crop/Product level that
you would like to base the auto boundary off of, click the right mouse button and select Regenerate Boundary. The
boundary will now be based off the selected dataset, and will update if new position information for this field, that is
currently not covered, is read in. Doing this also removes this Field from those that will be spatial sorted, so use
caution when doing this if you have used the Spatial Sorter in the past on the selected field.
How to create a new attribute.
Follow these steps to create a new attribute:
1.
Go to the Tools Menu and select Attribute Editor.
2.
The Select Attribute dialog will now open.
3.
Click the Add New button to create a new user-defined attribute.
4.
The Attribute Editor dialog will now open.
5.
Enter a name to be used to identify the attribute, such as Soil Compaction if you had data from a soil
compaction sensor to import.
6.
Now select a Data Type from the available list of options. For a description of the various data type options
for an attribute go to the help for the Attribute Editor.
7.
Depending on the Data Type that was set you will be required to either set a Display Type, Dimension and
Display Units, or none of these in the case of a Text data type.
8.
Now set whether or not the new attribute should be mappable. Check the mappable box to make the new
attribute available to map from the Layer Window when you map a dataset or management item that
contains the attribute.
9.
Lastly, set whether or not you want totals to be displayed in summaries,etc for the attribute and if so what
units the totals should be displayed in. So your logged values for each point can be shown in one unit and
the totals amounts of all the values can be shown in another more appropriate unit.
10. Click OK once all the settings have been made above to create the new attribute.
11. Click the Close button to exit the Select Attribute dialog.
How to create a new property.
Follow these steps to create a new property:
98
1.
Go to the Tools Menu and select Property Editor.
2.
The Select User Property dialog will now open.
3.
Click the Add New button to create a new user-defined property.
How to ...
4.
The Property editor dialog will now open.
5.
Enter a name to be used to identify the property, such as Hybrid if you would like to enter property values for
a crop hybrid.
6.
Now select a Data Type from the available list of options. For a description of the various data type options
for a property go to the help for the Property Editor.
7.
Depending on the Data Type that was set you will be required to either set a Display Type, Dimension and
Display Units, or none of these in the case of a String data type.
8.
The last setting is whether or not the new property should be mappable. Check the mappable box to make
the new property available to map from the Layer Window when you map a dataset or management item
that contains the property.
9.
Click OK once all the settings have been made above to create the new property.
10. Click the Close button to exit the Select User Property dialog.
Note: Properties can be added in bulk to multiple management items or datasets using the Batch Command Utility.
How to create/edit a custom Operation. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to create/edit a custom Operation:
1.
Go the Tools Menu and select Management List Editor.
2.
The Edit Management List Editor will now appear. Select Operation from the list and then click the Edit
List... button.
3.
The Edit Item dialog will now appear. Click the Add New button.
4.
The Edit Operation dialog will now appear. Enter a name for the operation on the Operation Info tab. Choose
a name that clearly identifies your new operation, such as Weather Conditions for example.
5.
Now click on the Operation Definition tab. Select an Attribute Group and then an attribute from that group
and add it to the list of selected items for your new operation. Check the Required for Import option for the
selected attribute if you want to require that the attribute be assigned to one of the import attributes when
importing data. Repeat this step for each attribute that you want assigned to this new operation. Click OK
when you are done.
6.
The Operation you created will now be available to select when saving data created in editors, as one of the
default Operations that you can select when creating a new Generic dataset, or when importing data.
Note: The Operation you created can also be adjusted from the Edit Item selection, available in the
Management Tree when you have an custom operation selected.
How to define Products
Follow these steps to fully define a Product:
1.
Select a product in the management tree that you would like to set or edit the properties for.
2.
Click your right mouse button. The Management Tree menu should appear. Select Edit Item. The Edit
Product dialog will now appear.
3.
The following tabs should have values set for the properties they contain, depending on the intended usage
and tracking of the product:

Product Info
This tab contains general information to define the type of product being used. Enter a custom
Product Name that best describes the actual product, such as the Hybrid or variety name for a seed
product. Then set a Product Group such as Grain for a product that will be used for seed and then
harvested, this will also try the available settings for the product on the Product Description tab.
Now select a Product Usage to further define how the product will actually be used in your
operation(s), i.e. Seed/Commodity for a product that will be planted and harvested. The Crop Type
should now be set to identify the crop that the product should be associated with, mainly for filtering
purposes on reports, maps, etc, so for a product that has been named based on its variety I would
select a Crop Type of Soybeans. The Product Mix option is only available for Product Groups that
are Application Rate related such as Fertilizing or Chemical. The Description allows you to
document details about a particular product. Lastly, the Is Active option defines whether or not the
product will be available for selection as a product in the Select Management dialog when new data
is being archived or data is being reprocessed.

Product Mix
This tab is only available when Product Mix is checked on the Product Info tab. A Product Mix must
be built from products that have already been created or already existed in the system; you can not
add new products from this dialog. Also it is recommended that your mixes add up to 100%, if
defining your mix by percentages to ensure resulting calculation based on the percentage of each
product in the mix add up to the totals and averages for the mix. Product Mixes can also be defined
99
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
by a Formula instead of using percentages. Formula based mixes allow you to define a mix that
contains a mixture of different product forms, such as a liquid mix that has both liquid and dry
products mixed into it. Product Mixes can only be defined for products that are assigned to the
Fertilizer or Chemical groups, and is best used when you have blended products that you would like
to track by the individual components that make up the mixed product.

Product Description
This tab provides specific properties than can be set that are appropriate to the Product Group that
was selected on the Product Info tab. Fill in as much information has you have or feel like, but it is
highly recommended that any entry that is highlighted in yellow be filled in with an appropriate for
the product. Properties highlighted in yellow are ones that can be used in other calculations.

Product Conversion
This tab allows the definition of conversion values for the product for application rate and harvest
operations. These conversions are used to calculate values such as Product Used/Needed, Product
Refills Required, and Product Unloads. The Use Multi-Use Conversion is only available for products
set to a harvest related Product Group and allows the definition of Mass and Dimensionless
application rates to cover situations where you may row plant, drill, or air seed the same product in
the same year but still want to track it under one product.
5.
Once your product has been fully defined or edited, click the OK button. Remember that if you forget to set a
property value that you meant to or realize later that you want to set a value for a property that can be used
in a calculation, you can always go back and edit a products property values and all the data linked to the
product will update appropriately.
How to add a property to a management item or dataset.
Follow these steps to add a property to a management item or dataset:
1.
Select a Grower, Farm, Field, or Dataset (Load/Region) in the Management Tree to add a property to.
Properties can not be added to a Year, Operation, Crop/Product, or Operational Instance.
2.
Click your right mouse button to display the Management Tree Menu and select Edit Item.
3.
Click on the Additional Properties Tab.
4.
Now click on the Add Property button to add a property.
5.
Select a property from the list of available user-defined properties or create a new property to use.
6.
Click OK once a property has been selected to add to the current management item.
7.
The selected property will now be displayed in a grid on the Additional Properties tab.
8.
To edit the value for the property that has been added, click on the Value grid cell next to the name of the
property and enter a value of make a selection from the available options.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 to add more properties if desired.
10. Properties can also be removed from a management item by clicking the Remove Property button and then
selecting the property(s) to be removed.
11. Click OK on the Additional Properties tab once you have finished adding a property(s).
12. The property(s) that was added can now be viewed in the Summary by selecting the Summary Tab and then
the Property sub-tab. The property can also be mapped by creating a map and then selecting the Selected
Property item from the list of attributes in the Layer Window, clicking the Edit Property button next to this
selection, and then selecting the management item that the property was added to and selecting it.
Properties can also be added to the general summary, reports, charts, and map printouts.
Or
1.
Go to the Tools menu and select Batch Command Utility. The Batch Command Utility dialog will appear.
2.
Under the Select a Batch Command combo, select Add/Set Property Value. Then click OK.
3.
You will now be prompted to set the data filters to select the management items/datasets to apply the
selected property to. Once you have set the desired filters click Next>.
4.
The edit Data Filter Results dialog should now appear. You can remove items that you do not want the
property added to or continue on with all the items shown in the results by clicking Finish.
5.
Select a property from the list of available user-defined properties or create a new property to use.
6.
Click OK once a property has been selected to add to the current management item.
7.
The selected property will now be displayed in a grid on the Additional Properties tab.
8.
To edit the value for the property that has been added, click on the Value grid cell next to the name of the
property and enter a value of make a selection from the available options.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 to add more properties if desired.
10. Click OK on the Additional Properties tab once you have finished adding a property(s).
100
How to ...
11. The property(s) that was added can now be viewed in the Summary by selecting the Summary Tab and then
the Property sub-tab. The property can also be mapped by creating a map and then selecting the Selected
Property item from the list of attributes in the Layer Window, clicking the Edit Property button next to this
selection, and then selecting the management item that the property was added to and selecting it.
Properties can also be added to the general summary, reports, charts, and map printouts.
How to edit property data.
Follow these steps to edit property data:
1.
Select a management item in the Management Tree that a property has been added to.
2.
Click the right mouse button to open the Management Tree menu.
3.
Select the Edit Item selection.
4.
Now click on the Additional Properties tab.
5.
A listing of the properties that have been added to the management item should be displayed along with the
value that has been entered for each.
6.
Click on a value a value entry that you wish to edit the value for and enter or modify the value.
7.
If you wish to remove a property instead of just edit it value, click the Remove Property button and then
check the property(s) that you want removed from the current management item selection. Click OK to
remove the selected properties.
8.
Once all the desired edits have been made, click the OK button to close the Edit dialog.
How to enter Financial Tracking entries.
Follow these steps to enter Financial Tracking entries:
If you have Basic...
1.
Go to the Product, Operational Instance, or Dataset in the management tree and select it or go to the
Management Item Editor and select the Product or Operational Instance you want to add an
expense/income entry for. If in the management tree select Edit Item or Edit Expense/Income or from the
Management Item Editor select Edit.
2.
If you aren't taken to it automatically select the Simple Expense/Income Entries Tab.
3.
Now click the Add Expense/Income button. You now need to select an Expense/Income Type.
4.
The available expense/income types that are listed to select from will be filtered to the ones that are
available for the management item type that you selected above. So if you picked the Product level, you will
see a different list of available types than if you picked the Operational Instance level.
5.
Select one or more expense/income types and click OK to add them.
6.
You will now return to the previous tab and your selected types should be listed in the entry grid. The entries
will be automatically named based on the item they are assigned to and the current date. You now need to
set the date span of data that the amount will be applied across, the amount of money, and the PER unit to
apply the money against.
7.
Once you have completed your entries, click OK to the Edit Item dialog to apply your additions and
changes. All expense/income related attributes that user or reference your entries will automatically update
when they are displayed with any additions or changes that you made.
8.
You can view your financial tracking related results in summaries, reports, charts, maps, and the Financial
Tracking report.
NOTE: All financial tracking results for Basic are dataset based, except for the Financial Tracking report
which will summarize across datasets to provide a bigger picture view of your financial information if you
want. Otherwise all expense, income, or profit/loss results will be displayed on an operation and dataset
basis and not summarize or report financial results across multiple operations for a field. Advanced must
be used to generate an overall Profit/Loss dataset that takes all financial entries into account to provide a
combined view of your financial information for a specific field and year.
If you have Advanced...
1.
You can use the steps above (Simple type entries only) or go to the Analysis Menu and select Financial
Tracking Entries or click on the Financial Entries Tab and select the Add Item button from the toolbar or
click your right mouse button in the tree area and select Add Item.. The Select Expense/Income Type dialog
should now appear.
2.
You now need to select an Expense/Income Type. There are two types of Expense/income to chose from,
Simple or Calculated. Simple types are what are available to Basic users and are directly tied to a Product,
Operational Instance, or Dataset management item. They also are direct amount entries that are always
based on money PER some unit. Calculated types are more involved and actually use multiple value entries
101
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
and sources to calculate an amount entry for you based on other values that are provided. Calculated types
also allow you to enter field level expense/income entries which Basic users can not do using Simple types.
3.
Assuming you are adding (or even editing) an entry, you will now see the Expense/Income Info dialog. This
dialog allows you to enter a name, description, and define the shares for the expense/income entry.


The first thing to do is enter a specific name and description that will allow you to easily identify an
expense/income entry from other entries. This is less important if you are trying to track individual
expense/income amounts but instead totaling everything before entry into the software, but if you
want to track each individual expense/income amount that goes into and comes out of your
operation then you need to have descriptive names and descriptions to help you quickly and
easily identify them on the Financial Tracking dialog as well as the Financial Tracking Report.
The last thing to do is to add any expense/income shares that you might have. If you want to add
shares, check the Share Expense/Income by Percentage box, and then click the Add button to
add People to share the expense/income with and to define the percentage share each will
receive. The overall share percentage must equal 100% between all people that will be sharing
the expense/income. The share values will appear on your Financial Tracking Report as separate
data columns that allow you to see individual and overall totals for each share holder as well as
overall totals.
Once you have set the required info for the expense/income click the NEXT> button.
4.
The Expense/Income dialog should now appear. This is the dialog where you actually enter in your
expense/income amounts and values as well as assign them to a management item(s) and in some cases a
time span to apply over.



The first thing to do is set where you want the expense/income values to apply to. Depending on
the Expense/Income Type you have selected, the available management selections that can be
set will vary. You need to select the item or items that the expense/income entry will apply to, for
example for a Commodity Sale you would select a particular Year, Grower, Farm, Field, and
Product to apply the sale amount to. In the case of a Product Purchase though, you might have
bought and applied enough product to cover 3 years of application of that product, that being the
case you want that expense to apply over multiple years. So you would select Multiple for the
Year selection and select all the years that the expense should spread out over. Then you would
pick the other specific links such as a Grower, Farm, Field, and Product.
The Second step, which is only available for the Product Purchases Type, is to set a time span
over which the expense should be applied. This is very useful when multiple purchases of a
product are needed within a year and different prices were paid for each purchase instance. By
setting a date span of when the purchase amount should apply, the software will only apply the
expense to data that meets the management link selections you made and also falls within the
date span you have selected.
The last step is to actually enter your expense/income values. The number and type of entries will
depend on the Expense/Income Type that was selected. There are basically three types of
formatting for the entry values:



White background - Generic entries that are not used in a calculation and are not
required for entry, they can be left blank without an affect on other values.
Yellow background - This is a required entry that is more than likely used as an input
into an equation for calculating one of the other values.
Gray background - This is a calculated entry that is more than likely used as an input
into an equation for calculating one of the other values or is the result of an equation.
Fill in the amounts as required and then click the CALCULATE button. This will then apply what
ever calculations or totaling that is set for the value entries, and fill in the cells with the
appropriate values.
NOTE: If you do not want to use the calculated results, you can manually type in a
Per Unit Value in the last entry for each type to set the value you desire. If you do
this then the other values above are not useful and should not be filled in and the
CALCULATE must not be selected, otherwise it will override your manual entry.
5.
You have now made a Financial Tracking entry and can run a report, profit/loss analysis, etc. The entry will
be displayed in the Financial Entries tree and you can select an entry from the tree to view all the details of
the entry in the Summary document on the Financial Entries tab.
NOTE: You can edit or delete your Financial Tracking entries from the Financial Tracking Tree by selecting an entry in
the tree and then selecting the Edit Item icon from the toolbar or clicking your right mouse button with and entry
selected and then selecting either Edit or Delete Item from the menu that appears.
How to generate a Financial Tracking report. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate a Financial Tracking report:
102
How to ...
1.
First, make sure that you have added some Financial Tracking entries so that you will actually get results
when you run the report.
2.
If you have entries, go to the Analysis Menu and select Financial Tracking Report.
3.
The Profit/Loss Report Options dialog should now appear. You need to select a resolution of detail for the
report that will be generated. Four filter levels are provided:




Year - Displays your profit/loss data grouped by Year and no other management items.
Grower - Displays your profit/loss data by Year and grouped by Grower and no other management
items.
Farm - Displays your profit/loss data by Year/Grower and grouped by Farm and no other
management items.
Field - Displays your profit/loss data by Year/ Grower/Farm and grouped by Field and no other
management items.
Now select a Data Source for the total amounts used in the report from the following available options:



Monitor Summary - Uses only summary totals from the monitor only, and doesn't use any spatial
data. This is the default selection and should provide the best indicator of profit/loss totals.
Spatial Records - Uses only spatial data for generating summary totals. This report will match
Profit/Loss analysis results the closest, but may not indicate actual profit/loss as closely since its
totals are based on spatial data only.
Manual Entries - Uses manual total values that have been entered for each dataset. Most useful
when you know exact totals that you want used, which the monitor or spatial sources do not
match.
Once you have selected your filter level and data source, you can now also select to Show Individual
Shares in Report. This option will break down your expense/income entries and the profit/loss values per
share that has been defined. This is the only location in the software where this share information is
calculated and totaled. Once you have made all your selections click the NEXT> button.
4.
You will now see the Select Data Filters dialog which will allow you to select the data you want included in
your report, such as ALL fields, a few select fields, or a single field for example. Once you have selected
your dataset filters, click the NEXT> button.
5.
The Edit Data Filter Results dialog will now be displayed and provides a tree view of all the datasets that met
your filter selections on the previous dialog. You can remove any datasets that are listed that you do not
want to be included in the generation of your Financial Tracking Report. Click the FINISH button once you
are satisfied with the datasets that will be used for the report.
6.
An Analysis Report document will now be displayed in the main window. In some situations an Analysis
Chart will also be generated. You can now edit the analysis report/chart display options, such as logos,
column names, the attributes to display on the report, etc. by clicking your right mouse button on the
report/chart and selecting Edit Report/Chart Options or under the EDIT menu and OPTIONS.
7.
Once you are satisfied with the Analysis Report/Chart you can select to print the document or Save to
Image. You can also save to a workspace to see the results when you open the workspace again.
How to create a 3D Plot. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to create a 3D Plot:
1.
Select a dataset from the management tree, either at the Operational Instance level to select all the datasets
below it or select an individual load/region dataset.
2.
Now go to the File Menu, select New, and then 3D Plot or from the main toolbar click the New 3D Plot
button.
3.
A 3D Plot Document should now be created that displays your plot, legend, and 3D Plot toolbar.
4.
You can now change various display options for the plot such as the legend, colors used, the display type
(either bar or surface plot), etc. You are also provided with tools to rotate, zoom, and pan the plot.
5.
You can also either print the 3D Plot and its legend by going to the File Menu and selecting Print or by clicking
the right mouse button while the cursor is over the plot and selecting Print. In addition, you can save the 3D
plot and legend to an image file by going to the File Menu and selecting Save to Image or by clicking the right
mouse button over the plot and selecting Save to Image.
NOTE: 3D plots can also be added to print layouts for the dataset that is currently displayed in the layout.
How to create a boundary.
Follow these steps to manually create a boundary dataset:
1.
Create a new map or add a layer to a map that you intend to create a boundary for.
2.
From the File Menu, select New then Boundary Layer or click the New Boundary icon on the Map Toolbar.
103
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
3.
The Boundary Editor dialog will now appear with a copy of the layer(s) that was in the Map window.
4.
Use the tools in the toolbar to add points or polygons, merge selections, snap points, and delete selections
to obtain the desired boundary.
5.
Select one the following or a combination to save or set the boundary:
6.

Click Save to enter the new data into the Management Tree and save the boundary into the
Management Tree. Note: If you want this boundary to be displayed when you select the field in
the Management Tree or be used for spatial sorting, and you don’t do the step below of setting the
boundary, then you must select the Boundary dataset in the Management Tree, click the right
mouse button, then select Set as Field Boundary to activate this boundary. The boundary will now
be used for spatial sorting and also to be displayed as the default boundary for the field.

Click Set Field/Farm Boundary buttons to set the boundary for a Field or Farm but not enter it into
the Management Tree. To use a Field or Farm boundary for spatial sorting this option should be
used.

Click Export to create an ESRI Shape, MapInfo MID/MIF, ASCII text file, or a BDY file for use in
the Ag Leader PF3000 or PF3000 Pro. Note: Boundaries exported as Ag Leader BDY’s will only
contain one boundary feature, so if you have created sub-boundaries then only one of the
boundaries will be exported and you will not be able to choose which one.
If Save is selected, select the management information for the new data and then click Accept.
How to edit a boundary.
Follow these steps to edit a boundary in the software:
1.
Select a Field from the Management Tree and create a new map or add a layer to the current map.
2.
From the Edit menu, click Layer… or click on the Edit Layer icon on the Map Toolbar.
3.
Use the tools in the toolbar to make any changes or additions.
4.
Click Save.
How to create a crop plan.
Follow these steps to create a crop plan dataset(s):
1.
The first step is to make sure that you have boundaries frozen or set for all the fields that you wish to create
crop plans for.
2.
From the File Menu, select New then Crop Plan(s).
3.
The Select Crop Plan Operation(s) and Product(s) dialog will now appear. Select a Crop Plan operation and
a Product from the list of available items to create your new Crop Plan dataset(s) based on or create a new
crop plan operation and/or Products to meet your planning needs. You can select multiple operations and
products to define multiple operations that will be occurring at the same time.
4.
Once you have selected your Crop Plan Operation(s) and Product(s), click OK.
5.
The Define Crop Plan dialog will now appear. Select one Operation and one Product at a time from the
combination you selected on the prior dialog for the Crop Plan. Then select the field(s) that you would like to
assign the Operation\Product to for your Crop Plan by adding them to the selected list. Then for each
Operation\ Product that you assign fields to, you can set the Target Start and End Date for each of the
Operation/Product combinations. You can also set default attribute values that will get created with the Crop
Plan dataset. Click NEXT once you have assigned your Field(s) and entered the default attribute values.
6.
The Select Management dialog will now appear. You only will need to set the Year. Click FINISH once you
have made your selections.
7.
Your Crop Plan dataset(s) has now been created. Go to the Management Tree and open a field that you
created a Crop Plan dataset for and you should be able to map your Crop Plan.
1.
Create a map of the Field Boundary from the Field that you want to create a Crop Plan for.
2.
Then from the File Menu and New or the map toolbar, select the Field Crop Plan Layer.
3.
The Select Crop Plan Operation dialog will now appear. Select a Crop Plan operation from the list to create
your new Crop Plan dataset based on or create a new crop plan operation to meet your planning needs. The
default crop plan operation is geared towards planting/seeding planning so if you would like to plan other
crop operation such as spraying or fertilizing then you will want to create a custom crop plan operation for
this purpose.
4.
The Select Management dialog will now appear. You only will need to set the Year, Operation, Operational
Instance, and Product to save your Crop Plan dataset to. Click FINISH once you have made your selections.
5.
The crop Plan editor dialog will now appear with your polygon shown that covers the same area as your field
boundary. It will be set to the same Product that you chose on the Select Management Tree.
or to create a Crop Plan for a single field and edit it immediately...
104
How to ...
6.
Use the provided tools to divide, delete, and/or modify the crop plan polygon region or create additional
polygons to assign products to.
7.
Once you have your crop plan regions defined, you can use the Product legend to assign Products to the
polygon regions. Click the Edit Legend button to select additional products to use in your crop plan. Once
you select a Product from the legend, click the Fill Product Regions button in the toolbar or select it from the
Map menu. Then click on each region on the map that you want to assign the selected Product from the
legend to. Repeat as needed to assign all the regions to a product.
8.
Once you have defined your Crop Plan regions and assigned products to them, click the Save button to
update your Crop Plan dataset.
How to edit a crop plan.
Follow these steps to edit your crop plan:
1.
Select and map your Crop Plan dataset from the Management Tree.
2.
From the Edit menu, click Layer… or click on the Edit Layer icon on the Map Toolbar.
3.
The Crop Plan editor dialog will now appear with your product region(s) displayed.
4.
Use the tools in the toolbar to make any changes or additions to the crop plan dataset. You can also add
additional Products to your legend to assign to your crop plan region(s).
5.
Click Save when done to accept your changes..
How to create a generic dataset.
Follow these steps to create a generic dataset:
1. Create a new map or add a layer to a map that you intend to create generic objects off of.
2.
From the File Menu, select New then Generic Layer or click the New Generic icon on the Map Toolbar.
3.
The Generic Editor dialog will now appear with a copy of the layer(s) that was in the Map window.
4.
Use the provided creation tools to add polygons, points, lines, circles, etc to the new generic dataset. You
can also use the Copy From Layer tool to copy an object from one of the layers that are visible in the
background.
5.
Once you have drawn, copied, or modified your desired objects for the new generic dataset, click on the
Data Grid tab.
6.
Now you can add an attribute(s) and then set values for each object that you have created or copied. If you
copied from another layer you had the option to copy its attributes, which will now be displayed if you chose
to copy them and they to can be edited.
7.
Once you have created the desired objects, setup attributes and added values for them, click the Save
button and set the management information for the new generic dataset. Click Accept when finished.
8.
The generic dataset that you created will now be mappable, have summary information, available for
generating reports and running queries on.
How to use the Average Data by Polygon Tool. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps for using the average by polygon tool:
Note: This tool can only be run on datasets that are vector (polygon) based and this tool does not make a
new dataset, just an average of a user selected attribute is being created and added to that dataset. An
example of this would be averaging point data, i.e. yield data by polygon, i.e soil type data.
1.
Create a new map and add a dataset(s) to the current map for all data desired to be used in the running of
the average by polygon tool.
2.
Enter the Generic Editor and select the Copy from Layer tool and run though it, selecting the vector/polygon
dataset, and then copy all the objects into a new layer.
3.
After the new layer has been created it can be used in the average by polygon tool. Since you have already
added all the other datasets into this map in step one you can now run the average by polygon tool. Click the
Average by Polygon button or select it from the Edit Menu.
4.
You should now see the Average Data by Polygon Settings dialog. In this dialog you have to set the Layer
and the Attribute from the layer that you want to include in the average by polygon function and in the end it
will be added to the dataset that you just created in step 3. After you select the layer and attribute, you can
just “Add” it to the Selected Attribute list on the right side of the dialog. Once you have the layer attributes
added to the list you can click OK and then the tool will run. Depending on the amount of data and the
complexity of the vector data this could take some time, so please wait for the hourglass to go away to
indicate that the process is complete.
Note: You have the ability to create a new attribute in this dialog and remap the attribute that is
selected to a new one. A example of this would be if you want to add multiple years of yield
data averages by polygon. You can create a new attribute for each year of avg yield and just
105
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
remap “Est. Volume (Dry)” to “Yield Dry 1998” and etc. In the end you would have multiple
years of yield history in the same dataset. The key is making sure to name each attribute
variation to be output with a good unique name that properly identifies it.
5.
After the process is complete, if you view the Data Grid tab you will see the objects for the polygon layer and
the attribute information that was copied into the new layer and averaged by polygon.
6.
Once you are satisfied with the results you can save the new dataset into the management tree and use the
dataset for other functions such as prescriptions, analysis, reporting, etc.
How to use the Vector Overlay Tool. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps for using the vector overlay tool:
Note: This tool can only be run on datasets that are vector based, i.e. if you want to merge two polygon
datasets into one combined result by creating a whole new dataset. I
1.
Create a new map and add any datasets to the current map that are intended to be used in the overlay and
generated into a single new dataset. Multiple datasets can be used if desired to make a new dataset.
2.
After the datasets are mapped, enter the Generic Editor and click the Vector Overlay tool button or select it
from the Edit Menu.
3.
You will now see the Vector Overlay Settings dialog. In this dialog you don’t have many choices. All you
have to choose is the datasets that you want to include in the overlay/merge process and then select if you
want the attributes from the datasets to be copied into the new overlay/merged dataset and then click OK.
4.
After the process is complete you should see a new dataset that was created that includes the two datasets,
combined into one. In every spot the two datasets intersected a new object/polygon was created and if
attributes where selected to copy then the attributes from the two layers are copied into the new
object/polygon. If you view the Data Grid tab you will see the objects and the attribute information that was
copied into the new dataset.
5.
Once you are satisfied with the results you can save the new dataset into the management tree and use the
dataset for other functions in the software such a prescriptions, reports, analysis, etc.
How to edit generic data.
Follow these steps to edit a generic dataset:
1.
Select a generic dataset from the Management Tree and create a new map or add a layer to the current
map.
2.
From the Edit menu, click Layer… or click on the Edit Layer icon on the Map Toolbar.
3.
Use the tools in the toolbar to make any changes or additions to the generic dataset or edit the values for the
objects on the Data Grid tab.
4.
Click the Save button to save any modifications to the original dataset or go to the File menu and select
Save As to save the changes to the generic dataset to a new dataset in the management tree.
How to create a guidance dataset.
Follow these steps to create a guidance dataset:
1. Create a new map or add a layer to a map that you intend to create guidance data off of.
2.
From the File Menu, select New then Guidance Layer or click the New Guidance Layer icon on the Map
Toolbar.
3.
The Guidance Editor dialog will now appear with a copy of the layer(s) that was in the Map window.
4.
Two tools are provided for creating guidance data. The Copy Guidance Region tool should be used when
you enter the editor with a polygon type layer (like a field boundary) that you want to copy and use as the
region you want guidance in. The Draw Guidance Region tool should be used when you want to manually
draw a polygon region that you want guidance generated inside of.
5.
If you select...


106
Copy Guidance Region
i.
Select a layer to base your guidance dataset of off and click NEXT>.
ii.
Now select the polygon objects that you would like to base your guidance dataset on.
Use the provided selection tools to make the desired polygon object(s) selection. Click
FINISH> once you have made your selection(s).
Draw Guidance Region
i.
Draw a polygon region on the map that you would like to create a guidance dataset
from. Click the left mouse button to define the sides of the polygon area.
ii.
Click the right mouse button when you are finished defining the guidance region.
How to ...
6.
The Guidance Settings dialog will now appear. Enter a swath width to define the distance between your
guidance passes inside of the guidance area selected in the previous step. Click NEXT> button once you
have made your entry.
7.
The Headland Settings dialog will now appear. Select the Headland Type and then based on the selected
type set the available options for that pattern. If No Headland is selected then your guidance passes will be
generated to the edge of the guidance region that was selected or drawn. Click the NEXT> button when
done.
8.
The Straight Line Settings dialog will now appear. Set the available settings for generating the guidance
passes in the guidance region. Click the FINISH button when you are done to generate your guidance
passes.
9.
The steps above can be repeated now if you would like to define additional guidance regions within the
same field and dataset. This might be useful if you have a field with areas that require a different pattern or
headlands to provide the best possible guidance.
10. Once you have created the desired guidance regions, click the Save button and set the management
information for the new guidance dataset. Click Accept when finished.
11. The guidance dataset that you created will now be mappable and even can provide resource tracking
attribute results or be used in the Dataset Playback tool (Advanced only).
Note: Your guidance dataset can be edited, but only the Guidance/Headland/Straight Line Settings can be
edited. The guidance region that was defined can not be edited. If the region needs to be edited you must
recreate it.
How to create navigation points.
Follow these steps to create navigation points in the software:
1. Create a new map or add a layer to a map that you intend to create navigation points off of.
2. Select a map type (Circle, contour, etc.) for the layer(s) that are on the map. Selecting the proper map type
for your layers can help in picking points to place navigation points.
3. From the File Menu, select New then Navigation Layer or click the New Navigation icon on the Map Toolbar.
4. The Navigation Edit window now appears with a copy of the layer(s) that were in the Map window.
5. Use the tools in the toolbar to add, move, and delete points.
6. Click on the Grid tab to view points that have been added and to manually enter point locations or edit the
name for a point.
7. Click Save to enter the new data into the Management Tree or click Export to create a PFN file for use in the
Ag Leader PF3000/PF3000 Pro or an ASCII text file of the navigation points.
8. If Save is selected, select the management information for the new data and then click Accept.
How to edit navigation points.
Follow these steps to edit navigation points in the software:
1.
Select a navigation dataset from the Management Tree and create or add to a map.
2.
From the Map menu, click Edit Layer… or click on the Edit Layer icon on the Map Toolbar.
3.
Use the tools in the toolbar to make any changes or additions.
4.
Click Save.
How to create a variable rate prescription.
Follow these steps to create a variable rate prescription dataset:
1.
Create a new map or add a layer to a map that you intend to use as a reference for the new prescription
dataset.
2.
Set the map type (Circle, contour, etc.) for the layer(s) that are on the map to a type that can be easily used
as a reference for the new prescription date set. For example if a layer is selected and gridded then the
resulting prescription may have holes where there are larger gaps between points than the grid cell size that
is used. But if the layer was set to a contour type, the data would be smoothed over and when it was
converted to a prescription dataset it would more closely resemble the reference layer in terms of the
regions represented by the contours. Point and line layers in their base form can not be used as references
for a prescription, they muct first be gridded or contoured.
3.
Once the reference layer to be used for the prescription has been added to the map and the map display
type set, go to the File menu and select New and then Prescription Layer or select the New Prescription icon
from the Map Toolbar.
4.
The Prescription Reference Layer Selection dialog should now appear. Now select a reference layer from
the list of layers that were open in the current map. Once a layer is selected it will display in the reference
layer preview window below. If None is selected as the reference layer, then a layer from the current map
will not be used as a reference to automatically generate a prescription dataset. Instead the layers that were
open in the current map will be used as a background for the Prescription Editor and the prescription dataset
must be manually "painted" in using the prescription editing tools.
107
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
5.
Click Next> after the reference layer has been selected.
6.
The Prescription Attribute Type and Units Selection will now appear. Select an Operation type that the new
prescription dataset will be created as, i.e. a Planter Prescription. Now select a rate attribute type for the
prescription data, i.e. Target rate (Seeds). Finally, select rate units for the selected rate attribute, i.e. sds/ac.
7.
Click Next> once all the required information has been set for the new prescription dataset.
8.
The Edit Prescription Legend dialog will now appear. Select the number of ranges equal to the number of
unique application rates that are desired for the prescription dataset or load an existing legend that has been
previously saved. Enter individual values for each range. The range values will be automatically sorted as
values are entered, from high to low at the bottom. Once the prescription legend is setup it can be saved for
latter use by clicking the Save button.
9.
Click the Next> button once the prescription legend is complete.
10. The Assign Legend Ranges dialog will now appear. Click on one of the ranges under Prescription Legend
Values and it will highlight. Now click on one or more ranges under Reference Layer Values and Map and
the selections will all highlight. Click on a highlighted item again to unselect it. Click the Add>> button to
assign the selected Reference Layer value(s) to the Prescription Legend value that was selected. This
assignment of values is displayed under Legend Assignment View. Repeat the steps above until all the
reference layer values have been assigned to values from the prescription legend, unless it is desired that
not all the reference values will be assigned rates. If you would like to remove or change an assignment,
select the Reference Layer value to be removed or changed from the tree under Legend Assignment View
and then click the <<Remove button. The Reference value(s) that were selected will now re-appear under
Reference Layer Values and Map. To remove all assignments click the <<Remove All button.
Hint: The reference layer map that is displayed below the range values for the reference layer can also be used
to make selections. Move your cursor over a region that corresponds to a legend range in the window above and
click the left mouse button. The range value that was selected on the map should highlight and can then be
assigned by clicking the Add>> button.
11. Click the Finish button after all the desired assignments have been made.
12. The Prescription Editor dialog will now appear. The new prescription dataset will be displayed in it and the
Prescription Legend that was used to create it. Various tools are provided for examining and editing the
prescription dataset if desired. The prescription dataset that has been created is a vector dataset by default.
You can convert the prescription to a raster type, which means the dataset will be broken up into rectangular
grid cells, by selecting the Convert Prescription tool. Export file formats that require a raster format are
handled by the exporter in the software so converting and saving the dataset to a raster type for storage in
the Management Tree is not required, unless you want to view and use the data in this form all the time.
13. Click the Export button to export the prescription dataset as either an ESRI Shape file, Case IH ENS or
PRE, New Holland PRE, or as a TGT prescription file for use in the Ag Leader PF3000 or PF3000 Pro for
variable rate control. Exported files are not saved in the system, so if you want to permanently keep the new
prescription dataset it must be saved, which is the next step.
14. Click the Save button to save the new prescription dataset into the Management Tree. The saved dataset
can be mapped or edited. Maps and reports can also be printed or exported. The Prescription Editor will
close after the Save is completed.
15. You have now successfully created a prescription dataset that can be used in an Ag Leader PF3000 or
PF3000 Pro to automatically control the rate of a product that is applied when connected to a supported
controller.
Note:
Ag Leader Technology, Case IH, or New Holland are not responsible or liable for any application errors or problems
associated with the use of prescription datasets and the resulting exports that can be created from these datasets. By
creating such datasets and exports you are assuming full responsibility for the results of using said datasets or
exports.
How to edit a prescription dataset.
Follow these steps to edit an existing or new prescription dataset:
108
1.
Select a prescription dataset from the Management Tree and map it. Then click on the Edit Layer icon on
the Map Toolbar or go to the Map menu and select Edit Layer. The Prescription Editor dialog should now be
displayed.
2.
The prescription dataset should now be displayed in the map window and the legend for the prescription
dataset displayed in the upper left corner of the dialog. A number of tools and options are provided for
examining and editing the prescription dataset, depending on whether the dataset is a vector or raster type
dataset.
3.
There are only two options for editing a prescription dataset. Regions can be edited/added/deleted or grid
cells can be edited/added/deleted using the available tools that are available per the dataset type. To edit
prescription values you must edit the values through the legend. You can change the range values for
assigned ranges and you can create new ranges. Rates can not be edited on the Data Grid tab. Note:
How to ...
Adding or deleting ranges can cause undesired results to the existing prescription dataset. A link to
the reference layer is not stored, so the prescription dataset is not updating based your changes in
regard to the reference layer that was originally used to create it. Adding ranges and assigning
values will cause the prescription dataset color and value assignments to shift. Changes to the
number of ranges and the order of values are not recommended and if desired you should create a
new prescription dataset with the changes in mind.
4.
Once the desired edits have been made you can click the Export button to generate an export for any of the
supported export file formats. Skip this step if you don’t want to export a file based on the edited prescription
dataset without saving the edit dataset into the management tree.
5.
To save the edited or new prescription dataset into the Management Tree, click the Save button. If the
prescription dataset is new you will be prompted to enter in the management information. If the dataset was
an existing one that was edited, then the changes will be automatically saved to the proper place in the
Management Tree. If you want to keep your original dataset in the Management Tree and also create a
saved dataset of the edited dataset select Save As… to save a new dataset without affecting the original.
Once saved, click the Close button to exit the Prescription Editor.
How to create a soil sampling dataset.
Follow these steps to create a soil sampling dataset:
1. Create a new map or add a layer to a map that you intend to create soil sampling points, grids, or regions off
of.
2.
From the File Menu, select New then Soil Sampling Layer or click the New Soil Sampling icon on the Map
Toolbar.
3.
The Soil Sampling Editor dialog will now appear with a copy of the layer(s) that was in the Map window.
4.
You have several options for creating a soil sampling points. The following are your options:
5.

Manually Add Points-Select the Add Sample Point tool and click on the map to add sample points
manually. Manually adding points can be done at any time, even if you select to use one of the
two methods that will generate a gridded or region sampling set for you.

Soil Sampling Wizard-Select the Generate Samples tool and follow the steps in the wizard to
create a gridded or region based soil sampling dataset.

Select a Region to Grid-Select the Select Sampling region tool, draw a polygon region to grid on
the map, and follow the gridding steps to create a gridded soil sampling dataset.
If you select the Generate Samples tool follow these steps, if not skip to step 6:

Select a layer and/or sub-layer to base your sampling dataset of off and click NEXT>. This step is
very useful if you are creating a sampling dataset by Soil Type, and allows you to select particular
soil types from a layer to generate sample points, grids, or regions for.

Now select the objects that you would like to base your sampling dataset on. Use the provided
selection tools to make the desired object(s) selection. Click NEXT> once you have made your
selection(s).

Sampling Parameters must now be set in order to generate the sampling dataset. Three options
for creating the sampling dataset are provided:



Create Sample Points - Select this option to create sample points.
Create Sample Grids - Select this option to create sample grids.
Create Sample Regions - Select this option to create sample regions from a selected
polygon(s), like a soil type layer or management zones.

Once you have selected the type of sampling dataset you want to create the parameters below
the options will allow entries or selections depending on what is appropriate for the creation type
you selected. If the Create Sample Points or Grids option was selected then enter an X and Y grid
size to base the sample point spacing off of. Then select a Grid Pattern that will decide where the
sample points are placed in the grid cells that are created. You must also pick a Grid Start location
that will be the place where the first sample point is placed and then a Grid Direction is needed
that specifies in what direction points will be placed from the start point. Click NEXT> once all the
parameters have been set. The Create Sample Regions has no sampling parameters and strictly
uses the polygon objects you selected in the first two items of step 5 to create your sampling
dataset.

A preview of the sampling grid and points that will be created will now appear. The grid and its
points can be shift left/right and up/down or rotated 360 degrees about the grid center. Click the
Reset Button to reset the grid location to the position it was when the preview was first created.
Click the Finish button when you are ready to create the sample points and add them to the Soil
Sampling editor map. A preview is not shown if you selected the Create Sample Regions option.
109
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual

6.
The sample points, grids, or regions will now be displayed on the map in the Soil Sampling editor
and selectable and editable.
If you select the Select Sampling Region tool follow these steps, if not skip to step 7:

Move your cursor over the Soil Sampling editor map and draw a polygon region that will be
gridded to generate sample points.


Click the right mouse button when you are finished drawing the polygon region to be gridded.

A preview of the sampling grid and points that will be created will now appear. The grid and its
points can be shift left/right and up/down or rotated 360 degrees about the grid center. Click the
Reset Button to reset the grid location to the position it was when the preview was first created.
Click the Finish button when you are ready to create the sample points and add them to the Soil
Sampling editor map.

The sample points, grids, or regions will now be displayed on the map in the Soil Sampling editor
and selectable and editable.
The Sampling Parameters dialog will now appear. Make all the required settings, see the
description of these settings above in step 6, and then click the NEXT> button.
7.
Now that you have generated or manually added sample points, grids, or regions you have many options for
handling this new data. You can save the data into the management system, export the data as one of the
available formats such as a PFN navigation file for use in the PF3000 or PF3000 Pro, or enter/import soil
sample lab results for each of the sample locations/regions.
8.
If you want to edit the soil sampling attribute values such as Soil OM (Organic Matter) then click on the Data
Grid tab. A grid of the default soil sampling attributes will now be displayed with entries for each of the
sample points that has been created. You can either manually enter in the values for each attribute entry or
you can import lab results from an ASCII text file. You can also select the sample locations/regions on the
editor map and then select the Row Editor to selectively edit the values for only the samples that you
selected.
9.
To import soil lab results from an ASCII text file follow these steps:


Go to the File Menu on the Soil Sampling Editor and select Import Sample Results.

You will now be required to set the import parameters for the ASCII text file that will be imported,
such as whether the file contains a header line. Click NEXT> once the parameters have been set.

In order to link the lab results contained in the import file to the sample points contained in the
system, a reference attribute must be chosen to link an attribute in existing and import dataset.
This will help ensure that point one in the sample point dataset is properly matched with the first
sample values in the import file. Most often the Feature ID in the systems soil sampling dataset
will be selected and matched with an attribute in the import file such as Sample ID or Point Name.
Click NEXT> once a reference attribute has been selected.

You must now assign attributes to the attributes that you wanted imported into the system and
used to fill in the soil sampling attributes that are contained in your soil sampling dataset. Set the
required reference attribute that you selected in the previous step to an attribute in the import set
that will be used to link entries in the two datasets. Then assign the soil sampling attributes in the
system to the columns in the import dataset that correspond to these attributes and that you want
stored and displayed.

Once you have setup the attribute columns for import you can save and import template that can
be loaded the next time you import lab results with identical formatting.


Click the Finish button to link and import the lab results into your soil sampling dataset.

The soil sampling dataset can now be saved in the Management Tree and mapped, reported,
displayed in summaries, etc.
Now select a file in one of the available file formats (Tab, Comma delimited ASCII or dBASE file)
that contains soil sample lab results. Most soil sample lab results do not contain lat/lon position
data, which is not required since you have the sample point positions already in the system. Click
OK once the file is selected.
The imported results data can now be viewed in the Soil Sampling editor by clicking on the Data
Grid tab.
or See How to import non-spatial data (i.e. Soil Lab Results). for another method to import soil lab results
quickly and easily for multiple fields.
1.
Once you have created your soil sampling dataset and made the desired settings, you can click the SAVE
button to save the dataset into the Management Tree. You can also select the Export button to export the
sampling data out in one of the many supported file formats.
How to edit soil sampling data.
110
How to ...
Follow these steps to edit soil sampling data:
1.
Select and map a soil sampling dataset.
2.
Go to the Edit menu and select Layer or click on the Edit Layer icon on the map toolbar.
3.
The Soil Sampling Editor will now appear.
4.
You now have several editing options. You can select and edit, move, merge, or delete sample points, grids,
or regions. You can add new sample points. You can import soil sample lab results for the sample points or
manually enter lab results for each sample location/region.
5.
Once you have made the desired changes to the soil sampling dataset, click the SAVE button to save your
additions or changes.
How to add Buffer Regions to an object. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to create and use buffers:
Note: Buffers can be created on all object types; Points, Polygons, lines, etc.
1.
Create a new map of the dataset that you want to add buffers regions to.
2.
There are a couple ways you can create buffer regions, you can create a new Generic or Boundary dataset or
you can add buffers to the original layer, i.e. the data that you just mapped. In most cases you are going to
want to edit the original layer and then after the buffers regions are created you can turn them off and on
when viewing the dataset. You can then click the Edit Layer button in the tool bar or go to the Edit Menu and
select Layer so you can edit the current layer.
3.
Once in the editor you need to select the object or objects that you want to add buffers to. After your
selections are complete (highlighted with a black border and pattern) click the Adjust Buffers button in the tool
bar. In this dialog you can set an Outer or Inner Buffer. Distances can be set for both the inner and outer
buffers at the same time. After the buffer distance(s) is entered click OK.
4.
You should now see the buffer created on the object(s). If you do not, click the Toggle Buffers button, this will
make the buffers visible or non-visible. Once you are satisfied and have all your buffers created, click the
Save button, this will update the dataset and add the buffers.
5.
To get the buffers to display, you will need to close your current map and re-created it. The buffers are
treated as a regular sublayer, so you have full control over the sublayer settings such as tooltips, labels, etc.
You can get to the sublayer settings by selecting the Edit Options button and going to the SubLayer Options
tab. There you will see the settings for the buffers and the other sublayer types..
How to edit an image. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to edit an image dataset:
1.
Select an image dataset from the Management Tree and create a new map or add a layer to the current
map.
2.
From the Edit menu, click Layer… or click on the Edit Layer icon on the Map Toolbar.
3.
Use the tools in the toolbar to make any changes or additions to the image dataset. The image contrast,
brightness, resolution can be adjusted for example. You can also crop the image, remap its colors, move the
entire image spatially, or even stretch or rotate the image to correct errors in it spatially.
4.
Click the Save button to save any modifications to the original dataset or go to the File menu and select
Save As to save the changes to the image dataset to a new dataset in the Management Tree.
How to create spatial notes.
Follow these steps to create spatial notes:
1.
Create a map or add a layer to a map that you would like to add a note to.
2.
Once the map is created or layer added, go to the Edit Menu and select Notes and either Layer Notes or
Landmark Notes. You can also go to the Map Toolbar and select the Layer Notes or Landmark Notes icon.
The following describes the difference between Layer and Landmark Notes

Layer Notes - Allows the user to add a spatial note(s) to the current dataset layer. These notes
are tied to the specific dataset they are added to and can only be viewed/edited when the same
dataset is mapped.

Landmark Notes - Allows the user to add a landmark note(s) that will be displayed whenever
spatial data is mapped. These landmark notes allow the marking and notation of permanent
landscape features such as wells, pump heads, builds, etc.
3.
The Notes Editor should now appear. You will see the layers that you have open in the current map
displayed in the background of the editor.
4.
Go to the Edit Menu on the editor and select Add Tools and then Add Note or select the Add Note icon from
the toolbar.
111
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
5.
Now move your cursor over the map and select a location that you would like to add a spatial note to. Click
the left mouse button to add a note to the map at the current location, which will be displayed as a gray
square.
6.
Once you have added a note, the Row Editor dialog will appear and allow you to enter a text note
description and set the Note Type. If you had selected to add Layer notes then you will be able to set Spatial
Note Types (General, Pest, Weed, Field, Tile) versus a Landmark Note Type (General only) for Landmark
notes. The note type selection can be used at a latter date to display as an attribute that is mapped in the
legend, to query by, to filter charts by, etc. You can also set an image for each note entry, called a Picture
Note. This image can then be viewed when you create maps and even be included in print layouts.
7.
Once you have added all the desired notes, click the Save button. The notes that you have created will be
saved. No specification of management information is needed when saving notes since they either save with
the current layer in the case of Layer notes or they save for display with all spatial data in the case of
Landmark notes.
8.
You can now close the editor and view the new or additional notes on the current map and/or layer.
How to edit spatial notes.
Follow these steps to edit spatial notes:
1.
Select and map a dataset that a spatial note(s) have been added to.
2.
Go to the Edit menu and select Notes and either Layer or Landmark Notes or click on the Layer or Landmark
Notes icon on the Map Toolbar.
3.
The Notes Editor will now appear.
4.
Use the selection tools to select a note to edit or use the Edit Feature selection to select a single note to edit.
You can also click on the Data Grid tab to see a list of the notes that are available for editing and edit their
values without selecting them on the map.
5.
Once you have made the desired additions or changes, click the SAVE button to save the notes.
6.
Click the CLOSE button to close the editor and return to the main map.
How to create associated data.
Follow these steps to create an associated dataset:
1.
Select a management item in the Management Tree such as a Field or a Load/Region that you would like to
add an associated dataset to.
2.
Click the right-mouse button to open the Management Tree menu.
3.
Select the Edit Associated Data selection. The Associated Data Viewer dialog will now appear.
4.
Click the Add New button to create a new associated dataset.
5.
You will now be required to select the type of associated data that you would like to create. There are
currently three selections available; Notes, Scale Ticket, and Cotton Gin Ticket. Notes Make your selection
and click the OK button.
6.
The Edit Associated Data dialog will now appear. Enter a name for the new associated dataset in the
Name/ID entry that will allow you to easily pick it from a list of other associated datasets that you may
created of the same type. Now enter a value(s) for all the attributes that allow entry and that you want enter
a value for. If units are available for the value being entered you can also select what unit the entered value
represents. Values displayed with a gray highlighting represent values that will be calculated by other entries
that you make. Click the Calculate button to fill in all the values for calculated attributes.
7.
Once you have filled in the desired information for the new associated dataset, click the OK button.
8.
The Save Associated Data dialog will now appear. This dialog displays the management items that the new
associated dataset can and will be linked to. The current management item that was selected to add the
associated data to is displayed but not editable. A list of additional management items is also displayed that
represents the management items that are above the current management item in the management
hierarchy. You have the option to uncheck each of the additional management items so that the new
associated dataset is not tied strictly to the current management item selections. If you uncheck a specific
management item then the new associated dataset will be applied to all instances of that management item
and not the specific one that is displayed. For example, if you add a Note to a Field and then uncheck the
additional items of Grower and Farm, then all Fields in the system will get this note as well. If all the
additional management items are left checked then the note will only be displayed when the specific Field
that you selected to add the note to is selected in the Management Tree. Click the OK button when you have
made your management selections.
9.
The associated dataset that you added will now be displayed in the Associated Data Viewer.
10. Click the Close button to exit the viewer.
How to edit an associated dataset.
Follow these steps to edit an associated dataset:
112
How to ...
1.
Select a management item in the Management Tree that associated data has been added to.
2.
Click the right mouse button. The Management Tree menu should appear.
3.
Select Edit Associated Data.
4.
The Associated Data Viewer dialog will now appear.
5.
Select the type and name of the associated dataset that you want to edit and click the EDIT button.
6.
The Edit Associated Data dialog will now appear.
7.
Make the desired changes to the dataset and click the OK button.
8.
Now set the management item links and click the OK button.
9.
Click the CLOSE button on the Associated Data Viewer dialog to end editing and viewing of the associated
dataset.
How to create split planter data.
Follow these steps to create split planter data:
Note: Split planter data can only be created for Site Verification and Application Rate data. All other forms of
data will not allow the option to create split planter data.
1.
Select the dataset in the Management Tree that you want to create split data for and then right click on the
dataset and select Create Split Planter Data.
2.
The Split Planter Equipment Settings dialog will now appear. Select the desired Operation and Rate Units
that you want to apply to the new split planter datasets. The Operation will be the location the data is saved
after the processing is complete. Then you will need to select the desired Swath Width Type; there are three
options to choose from for the Swath Width Type; Full Swath, Manual Swath Entry, and Partial Swath.



Full Swath - Select this option if you want to use the swath that was logged in the file. In most
cases this option will be the recommended choice.
Manual Swath - Select this option if you want to manually enter the swath for each side of the
planter. This option can be useful if you have an offset swath such as a 12 row planter and the
splits are at 8 rows and 4 rows. Or this option can be used if the swath for some reason was not
logged properly in the file.
Partial Swath - Select this option if the dataset was logged at half swath, i.e. you only logged
data on one side of the planter and had your monitor setup to log the data that way. This option
doubles the logged swath, and after processing the split planter dataset the results will be as if
the dataset was logged at full swath originally.
After you have selected the Swath Width Type you can click the Next> button, unless Manual Swath is
selected; then you will need to enter the full swath width of the planter.
3.
The Split Planter Swath Settings dialog will now appear. In this dialog you have to define swath settings for
each side of the planter by clicking on the sections below the tractor and then entering the appropriate
settings for the selected section.
4.
Start by entering a Dataset name and defining a product for each side of the planter. At this point it's
recommended that you create a new product and use the hybrid or variety name for the product that was
planted with each side of the planter.
5.
Next, set the Swath Section Width for each side of the planter. If Full Swath or Partial Swath were selected
in Step 2 then the only option you will have is automatic. If Manual Swath was selected in Step 2 then enter
the appropriate swath width for the Left and Right side of the planter.
6.
Continue to the Set Applied Rate selection. At this point, depending on the source of the data (Application
Rate or Site Verification), you have different options to set. If Site Verification is the source of the data then
you will only have the option of entering a manual rate for the left or right side of the planter. If Application
Rate data is the source then you can use the logged rate or enter a manual rate. An example of this would
be if you did variable rate planting on the left side and a manual rate on the right side you can use the
logged rate for the left side and set a manual rate for the right side. Once both sides have been fully
defined you can hit the Finish button to start the processing.
Note: After the processing is complete the source dataset that was used to make the split will no longer be
located in the same spot in the management tree. You will now have two new datasets using the settings
that were defined when the create split planter feature was run.
How to add a simple analysis function(s).
Follow these steps to add a simple analysis function(s) to a dataset(s):
1.
Select an Operational Instance to apply a simple analysis function(s) to all the datasets below it or select an
individual dataset from the Management Tree.
2.
Click the right mouse button to open the Management Tree menu.
113
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
3.
Select the Add Simple Analysis selection.
4.
The Select Analysis Operation dialog will now appear. This dialog provides the list of simple analysis
functions that can be applied to a dataset. The current options are Filter Data, Normalize Data, and Scale
Data. The following is a brief explanation of each of these selections:

Filter Data-Allows the entry of minimum and maximum values for a selected attribute to filter out
values that do not fall with in the specified range. This is very useful for imported data that has not
had any filtering applied to it.

Normalize Data-Creates a new normalized attribute for each attribute that has been selected to be
normalized. The original attributes values are re-scaled based on which normalization method you
select. This is useful when trying to compare data across years for the same field but different
crops were grown each year with varying yield ranges that don’t compare in their base form.

Optimize Swath Widths-Allows the automatic adjustment of the swath width for each logged point
in a dataset so that there is not any overlap with other logged points. Attribute values that are per
area are also adjusted to the new swath width value. This useful when you overlapped passes
while harvesting, planting, and were actually only working a smaller swath but did not or could not
adjust the swath to the proper working width at the time.

Reassign Attribute Values - Allows the reassignment of values in a dataset to new or different
values. This would be commonly used to adjust the target rates in a variable rate prescription that
needed to be adjusted. Specific values or a range of values can be reassigned, including a
combination of both.

Scale Data-Allows the entry of a scale factor that will be applied to selected attributes. This is
most useful when you have import data that requires scaling to correspond with other data you
already have or you have data that has a known constant error that can be factored out using a
scale factor.
5.
Once you have decided on a simple analysis function to apply to the data, select it and then click the OK
button.
6.
An attribute(s) selection dialog will now appear. Select the attribute(s) that you would like the simple analysis
function applied to. Once you have made your selection(s) click the NEXT> or FINISH button if the Optimize
Swath Widths was selected.
7.
If Filter Data or Scale Data were selected you will now be prompted with a value entry dialog. For Filter Data
you will be required to enter the Minimum Value and click the NEXT> button and then be prompted for the
Maximum Value and then click FINISH to apply the filters. For Scale Data you enter the Scale Factor Value,
a value greater than 0 with 1 equaling 100%, and then clicking the FINISH button to apply the scale factor. If
Normalize Data was selected then you will be prompted to select a normalization method to use, click the
FINISH button once you have made your choice.
8.
The selected dataset(s) will now be processed with the selected simple analysis function.
9.
Once finished the dataset(s) that had a simple analysis function applied to them will now have a summation
icon displayed next to them indicating that they have had a simple analysis function applied to them. The
Summary will also change to reflect the function that was applied. Note: Simple analysis functions are
applied to the spatial data for a dataset and not the monitor summary. The displayed values are adjusted for
the spatial summary data only.
10. You can repeat the steps above to add multiple simple analysis functions to a dataset to arrive a desired
result. Make sure to apply the simple analysis functions in the order that you want them to apply, such as a
Filter function before a scale function so that low values don’t get scaled above your minimum value for
example.
Or
Follow these steps to add a simple analysis function to multiple datasets in a batch process:
114
1.
Go to the Tools menu and select Batch Command Utility.
2.
Now select the Add Simple Analysis batch command and then the simple analysis function that you would
like applied in batch, i.e. Scale Data.
3.
You will now be prompted to set the data filters to select the management items/datasets to apply the
selected function to. Once you have set the desired filters click Next>.
4.
The edit Data Filter Results dialog should now appear. You can remove datasets that you do not want the
analysis applied to or continue on with all the datasets shown in the results by clicking Finish.
5.
An attribute(s) selection dialog will now appear. Select the attribute(s) that you would like the simple analysis
function applied to. Once you have made your selection(s) click the NEXT> or FINISH button if the Optimize
Swath Widths was selected.
6.
If Filter Data or Scale Data were selected you will now be prompted with a value entry dialog. For Filter Data
you will be required to enter the Minimum Value and click the NEXT> button and then be prompted for the
Maximum Value and then click FINISH to apply the filters. For Scale Data you enter the Scale Factor Value,
How to ...
a value greater than 0 with 1 equaling 100%, and then clicking the FINISH button to apply the scale factor. If
Normalize Data was selected then you will be prompted to select a normalization method to use, click the
FINISH button once you have made your choice.
7.
The selected dataset(s) will now be processed with the selected simple analysis function.
8.
Once finished the dataset(s) that had a simple analysis function applied to them will now have a summation
icon displayed next to them indicating that they have had a simple analysis function applied to them. The
Summary will also change to reflect the function that was applied. Note: Simple analysis functions are
applied to the spatial data for a dataset and not the monitor summary. The displayed values are adjusted for
the spatial summary data only.
9.
You can repeat the steps above to add multiple simple analysis functions to a dataset to arrive a desired
result. Make sure to apply the simple analysis functions in the order that you want them to apply, such as a
Filter function before a scale function so that low values don’t get scaled above your minimum value for
example.
How to edit a simple analysis function(s).
Follow these steps to edit a simple analysis function(s) that is applied to a dataset(s):
1.
Select an Operational Instance that has a simple analysis function(s) applied to the datasets below it or
select an individual dataset(s) from the Management Tree.
2.
Click the right mouse button to open the Management Tree menu.
3.
Select Reprocess Analysis. The Reprocess Analysis dialog will now appear.
4.
Now select a simple analysis function and click the Edit button.
5.
You can now set the attribute(s) that the simple analysis function is being applied to and enter in a value for
the function, such as a scale factor for the Scale Data function. Click OK when done with your changes.
6.
In addition to editing, you can add new functions to be applied to the dataset by clicking the Add New button
ot remove a function by clicking the Remove button.
7.
You can also change the order in which simple analysis functions are applied to a dataset if you have
multiple functions assigned. Select a function from the list and use the Up or Down button to move the
function higher or lower in the list. Simple analysis functions are applied to a dataset in the order that they
are listed.
8.
Once desired changes have been made, click the OK button.
9.
If multiple dataset(s) were selected or an Operational Instance was selected with multiple datasets linked to
it, the Reprocess Analysis dialog will appear for each dataset. Changes made one on instance of this dialog
for a dataset do not apply to any other datasets. Each dataset must be edited individually if you want a
common setting to apply to all the datasets involved.
How to remove a simple analysis function(s).
Follow these steps to remove a simple analysis function(s) from a dataset(s):
1.
Select an Operational Instance that has a simple analysis function(s) applied to the datasets below it or
select an individual dataset(s) from the Management Tree.
2.
Click the right mouse button to open the Management Tree menu.
3.
Select Reprocess Analysis. The Reprocess Analysis dialog will now appear.
4.
Select the simple analysis function to be removed and click the Remove button.
5.
Click the OK button.
6.
Repeat steps 3 thru 5 for each dataset that was selected for reprocessing.
7.
Once all the datasets have bee reprocessed, the simple analysis icon will be removed from all datasets in
the Management Tree that no longer have a simple analysis function applied to them.
8.
The data that is displayed in the summary, however, still reflects spatial data only and not monitor summary
data, if that is what the summary was set to display. To display the monitor summary values you must select
the datasets in question, click the right mouse button and select the Reprocess Data option from the
Management Tree menu. Click OK to each reprocessing dialog for each dataset that you are prompted for.
When finished the monitor summary values should be displayed in the summary, on reports, etc.
Or
Follow these steps to remove simple analysis function(s) from multiple datasets at one time:
1.
Go to the Tools menu and select Batch Command Utility.
2.
Now select the Remove Simple Analysis batch command and click OK.
3.
You will now be prompted to set the data filters to select the management items/datasets to apply the
selected batch command to. Once you have set the desired filters click Next>.
115
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
4.
The edit Data Filter Results dialog should now appear. You can remove datasets that you do not want the
functi
5.
on removed from or continue on with all the items shown in the results by clicking Finish.
6.
All the Simple Analysis functions that have been added to the selected datasets will now be removed.
How to merge cotton pickings.
Follow these steps to merge cotton picking datasets:
1.
Make sure that you have properly organized your cotton harvest datasets so that you have first and second
pickings for a field sorted into separate Operational Instances. This is required for this analysis tool to
function properly.
2.
Go to the Tools menu and select Merge Cotton Data.
3.
The Select Data Filters dialog will now appear. Select a Grower, Farm, Year, and Field to merge operational
instances for. Click the NEXT> button after you have set the filters.
4.
The datasets that matched the filter you specified will now be displayed. Remove and datasets that you don’t
want to be used in the merge process. Click FINISH when done.
5.
The datasets will now be processed and merged. Once the merging is compete, the Select Management
dialog will appear. Set the management information for the new merged cotton dataset that has been
created. It is recommended that you create a new operational instance called "Merged" for example that you
can use whenever you merge cotton data to make viewing and working with merged cotton data easier and
more productive. Click ACCEPT once the management selections have been made.
6.
The new merged picking dataset will be added to the Management Tree now. The dataset that was created
will be displayed with a function icon next to its name denoting that the dataset has been created using a
general analysis function. Note: Datasets created through a merge process will not provide values that are
the exact sum of the original datasets used to create them. Due to the fact that the original data must be
gridded to merge into one new dataset there is a certain amount of smoothing and averaging that will occur
that will yield results that will not exactly match manual totaling or averaging of the original datasets. Merged
data should be used as reference to determine general trends in a field and provide a good estimate of what
a field produced.
How to straighten a pass on a point dataset.
Follow these steps to manually straighten GPS point data in a pass:
1.
Select and map a dataset(s) that you would like to straighten GPS points for.
2.
Go to the Edit menu and select Layer or click on the Edit Layer icon on the map toolbar.
3.
The Point Map Editor will now appear.
4.
Now select the points or pass that you would like to straighten using the selection tools.
5.
Once you have made your selection(s), got to the Edit menu on the editor and select Straighten Pass or click
on the Straighten Pass icon on the editor toolbar.
6.
Now draw a line or line segments that represent the new path that the points that are selected should be
placed in. Once you have drawn the new path, click the right mouse button to display the straightened data
points.
7.
The Straighten Pass tool can continue to be used as along as the points are selected so that you can get the
points straightened exactly as you desire.
8.
Once you have made the desired changes click the SAVE button to save the new point position.
How to update a merged cotton dataset.
Follow these steps to update a merged cotton dataset with newer data that has been read into the system:
1.
Select a dataset that that has been created using the Merge Cotton Data tool. This data will be displayed in
the Management Tree with a function icon to the left of the dataset name.
2.
Click the right mouse button to open the Management Tree menu.
3.
Select Update Analysis Dataset.
4.
You will now be prompted to select data filter information that will be used to select the data that will be used
to update the merged dataset. Click the OK button once you have made your selections.
5.
The data filter results will now be displayed and you can remove any datasets that you do not want used to
generate the updated merged cotton dataset. Click the OK button when finished.
6.
The merged cotton dataset will now be regenerated using the selected dataset.
How to generate correlation results. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate attribute correlation results:
1.
116
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
How to ...
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Correlation Analysis button from the
list of Analysis Functions. Click the ADD button to create a new saved Correlation Analysis or select a saved
analysis from the list.
3.
If creating a new analysis to save, the first step is to give a custom name and description to the new
analysis function. Click the NEXT> button to continue.
4.
The Select Analysis Input Datasets dialog should now appear. This dialog allows you to select the data that
will be used in your correlation analysis. Two options for adding input datasets are provided:


Add Dataset - This option allows you to select any dataset from the system using the
standard Select Data Filter.
Add All Datasets from Map - This option adds any datasets/layers that you have open
in the current map into the list of input datasets for analysis.
Once you have made your selections for inputs to select attributes from, click the NEXT> button.
4.
The Select Correlation Attributes dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to select the attributes that
are available based on the Input Dataset that you selected and that you would like used in your correlation
analysis. Add the attributes from the Available Items list into the Selected Items list that you want to use in
the correlation. Click the FINISH button once you have made your selections. Make sure to pick at least two
different attributes.
5.
Your analysis function has now been created and saved automatically. To run the saved analysis function
you just built, make sure you select the function in the list of saved analysis' and then select either the
Single Field button or the Multiple Fields button to run your analysis. A dataset filter will now appear that will
allow you to select data from a single field or multiple fields depending on the option you selected. Click
NEXT> once you have selected your dataset filter, then review the datasets that have been found for use in
your analysis and then click FINISH run to the analysis.
6.
Once the analysis completes, you will return to the main window and an Analysis Document will be
displayed. You will see your correlation results in a matrix format, as well as tabs containing analysis charts
for the correlation data. You can now edit the analysis report/chart display options, such as logos, column
names, the attributes to display on the report, etc. by clicking your right mouse button on the report/chart
and selecting Edit Report/Chart Options or under the EDIT menu and OPTIONS.
7.
Once you are satisfied with the Analysis Report/Chart(s) you can select to print the current document or
Save to HTML for a report or Save to Image for a chart. You can also save a workspace to see the currently
displayed results when you open the workspace again.
How to generate a cluster analysis dataset. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate a cluster analysis dataset:
1.
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Cluster Analysis button from the list
of Analysis Functions. Click the ADD button to create a new saved Cluster Analysis or select a saved
analysis from the list.
3.
If creating a new analysis to save, the first step is to give a custom name and description to the new
analysis function. Click the NEXT> button to continue.
4.
The Select Analysis Input Datasets dialog should now appear. This dialog allows you to select the data that
will be used in your cluster analysis. Two options for adding input datasets are provided:


Add Dataset - This option allows you to select any dataset from the system using the
standard Select Data Filter. .
Add All Datasets from Map - This option adds any datasets/layers that you have open
in the current map into the list of input datasets for analysis. This is very useful if you
are editing, viewing, etc datasets in a map and then decide that you want to use them
in a cluster analysis.
5.
Once you have made your selections for inputs and set the gridding options for each input dataset, click the
NEXT> button.
6.
The Select Cluster Attributes/Properties dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to select the
attribute/properties that you want to generate a cluster analysis dataset for. The selected attributes can also
be set to be normalized, individually. Normalizing is very useful when you will be averaging data together
from the same operation but whose data ranges do not match, such as Soybean and Corn yields which are
not directly comparable in their normal form, but when normalized to a similar scale then they can be directly
compared. Two normalization methods are provided for you to select from. Once you have selected the
attributes/properties to cluster, click the NEXT> button.
7.
The Cluster Settings dialog will now appear. Select the number of clusters that you would like to generate in
the result dataset. Click the FINISH button once the setting is made.
117
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
8.
Your analysis function has now been created and saved automatically. To run the saved analysis function
you just built, make sure you select the function in the list of saved analysis' and then select either the Single
Field button or the Multiple Fields button to run your analysis. A dataset filter will now appear that will allow
you to select data from a single field or multiple fields depending on the option you selected. Click NEXT>
once you have selected your dataset filter, then review the datasets that have been found for use in your
analysis and then click FINISH run to the analysis.
9.
The Analysis Editor will be displayed once the analysis completes, showing a preview of the spatial dataset
that was created. No editing is allowed in this editor and its purpose is more for a visual check of your results
before they are actually saved into the system. Tooltips should be displayed as you move your cursor over
the grid cells on the map. At this point the data has not been saved and if you click the CLOSE button your
results will be lost and you will have to re-run the analysis function to get a new analysis dataset. The
mapped attribute can be switched to show the result attributes that are created. A Dataset Name entry is
also provided where you can enter in a custom name that will be used to save the dataset in the
management tree.
10. Once you are satisfied with the results displayed and you want to save them into the system, click the SAVE
button.
11. The Management Selection dialog should now appear. Select where you would like the cluster analysis
dataset saved and click the ACCEPT button.
12. You have now successfully created and saved a cluster analysis dataset that can be mapped, printed, used
in another analysis function such as an input to an equation, etc.
How to generate comparison results. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate attribute/property comparison results:
1.
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Comparison Analysis button from the
list of Analysis Functions. Click the ADD button to create a new saved Comparison Analysis or select a
saved analysis from the list.
3.
If creating a new analysis to save, the first step is to give a custom name and description to the new
analysis function. Click the NEXT> button to continue.
4.
The Select Dataset for Comparison dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to chose the data that you
will be getting the result data from, what we call the Input Dataset. Only a single input dataset can be
selected. Then select the dataset(s) that contain attributes or properties that you want to compare/classify
the input dataset by. An example would be that I want to see my Yield and Moisture averages by Soil Type,
Field, Product for the current Year. So I would select an input dataset that contained Grain Harvest (Yield,
Moisture, etc) data and then I would select the dataset(s) that contained the comparison attribute(s) or
property(s) so I'd select a Soil Type dataset.


The first step is to select the Dataset for Comparison (the Input Dataset). Click the EDIT button.
The Edit Input Dataset Settings dialog will appear. Click the Edit Selection button and use then
use the Select Data Filters dialog that appears to select the dataset(s) that you want to select.
Click NEXT> when done and then verify the results of the filter and click FINISH. You will now be
returned to the Edit Input Dataset Settings dialog where your input dataset selection will be
displayed. You can also edit the Grid Settings for the processing of the dataset at this point by
clicking the EDIT button in the Grid Settings area if you desire. Once you are finished with all your
selections and settings, click the OK button.
Now that you have selected your Input Dataset, you now need to select the comparison
attribute/property dataset(s) that will be used to compare and classify the data in the Input
Dataset. Click the ADD button to go to a Select Data Filters dialog and select your dataset as
described above. Once finished you will see your selected dataset and have the option of
adjusting its grid settings. Click OK when you are done with the selection and the settings. You
should now see the selected dataset listed. You can add as many datasets as you want to use in
the comparison.
Once you have the Input and Comparison Datasets selected click the NEXT> button.
118
4.
The Select Result Attribute(s) to Output dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to select the
attributes that are available based on the Input Dataset that you selected and that you would like generated
in your analysis result report and chart(s). Add the attributes from the Available Items list into the Selected
Items list that you want to generate in the analysis results. For the example listed above, for a Grain Harvest
input dataset, you would pick Estimated Volume (Dry) and Moisture as your outputs. Click the NEXT>
button once you have made your selections.
5.
The Select Result Grouping dialog will now appear, and is the last step in the wizard. This dialog allows you
to select the attributes or properties from the Input Dataset (your Grain Harvest dataset for example) and/or
the Comparison datasets (your Soil Type dataset for example) that you selected previously. So continuing
the example listed above, You would select the Soil Type attribute from your Soil Type dataset you selected
as one of the comparison datasets, then from the Input Dataset you would select the Product Name
property and the Field name property. Make sure that you order the selected properties and/or attributes in
How to ...
6.
Your analysis function has now been created and saved automatically. To run the saved analysis function
you just built, make sure you select the function in the list of saved analysis' and then select either the
Single Field button or the Multiple Fields button to run your analysis. A dataset filter will now appear that will
allow you to select data from a single field or multiple fields depending on the option you selected. Click
NEXT> once you have selected your dataset filter, then review the datasets that have been found for use in
your analysis and then click FINISH run to the analysis.
7.
Once the analysis completes, you will return to the main window and an Analysis Document will be
displayed. You will see your comparison analysis report as well as two tabs containing analysis charts for
the comparison data. You can now edit the analysis report/chart display options, such as logos, column
names, the attributes to display on the report, etc. by clicking your right mouse button on the report/chart
and selecting Edit Report/Chart Options or under the EDIT menu and OPTIONS.
8.
Once you are satisfied with the Analysis Report/Chart(s) you can select to print the current document or
Save to HTML for a report or Save to Image for a chart. You can also save a workspace to see the currently
displayed results when you open the workspace again.
How to run a batch comparison analysis. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to run a batch comparison analysis:
The difference between running a Comparison analysis function on a single field versus running it in batch mode is the
amount of data that can be compared. The batch process for the comparison analysis is different than some of the
other analysis functions such as the Equation Analysis in that instead of looping through your data and creating
individual datasets for each management item you set it to apply to, it takes all the data you want included and uses it
all for the generation of one overall, combined result. This is extremely powerful in terms of being able to do a whole
farm analysis. For example, if you want to know how a certain Soybean Variety performed across your entire Farm, by
Field and Soil Type, then running your analysis across multiple fields will provide you this answer.
1.
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Comparison Analysis button from the
list of Analysis Functions. Click the ADD button to create a new saved Comparison Analysis or select a
saved analysis from the list.
3.
Now just follow Steps 3) thru 6) in How to generate comparison results. The difference is if you have
selected multiple datasets to compare against you will be prompted to setup relative filters to handle the
processing in batch.
4.
You will first be prompted with the Select Reference Dataset dialog. This function is used to select which
comparison dataset will be used to iterate through your data but for comparison analysis a selection is not
required because the software has chosen the optimal dataset based on the selections you have already
made. Click the NEXT> button.
5.
The Select Related Data Filters dialog will now appear. This dialog is the key to the success of the batch
process. It allows the selection of how and where the software should search through your data for the
comparison datasets that exist through out your system, even though you did not specifically select them
when you built the comparison analysis function. The goal is to indicate to the software for each
management item, how to search and what to look for at each level, thus finding the related datasets to
what you defined in the comparison analysis.


By default the system enters in optimal results based on the design of your comparison analysis
function. For example if the comparison dataset you selected was a Soil Type dataset with an
Operation of Generic 1 and was from 2003, the software will set these as FIXED requirements for
the Year=2003 and the Operation=Generic 1, meaning it will only looks at data that meets those
two requirements at those levels for inclusion into the analysis. All the other settings are now up
to you.
By default Grower, Farm, and Field are set to SAME, which the analysis will use the same
Grower, Farm, and Field that the Soil Type dataset came from in the example we are using.
These settings should normally be left as they have defaulted unless for example you know that
the data that should be used is only located in a certain year or maybe only under a certain
grower, in which case you would want to change the Iteration Type to FIXED and make a specific
management item selection.
Once you have set the related filters, click the FINISH button.
3.
The Select Data Filters dialog will now appear. This step in the process allows you to decide what input
datasets you want included in the analysis, thus overriding your original selection. So if you want to include
Grain Harvest data from all the years you have collected data for, all your fields, all products, then you can
119
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
make these selections and all that data will go into the comparison analysis. This provides you with as much
flexibility as possible in determining how much or how little you want to get compared in the results. Once
you have made your selections, click the NEXT> button.
4.
The Edit Data Filter Results dialog will now be displayed and provides a tree view of all the datasets that
met your filter selections on the previous dialog. You can remove any datasets that are listed that you do not
want to be included in the comparison analysis. Click the FINISH button once you are satisfied with the
datasets that will be used for the analysis.
5.
Once the analysis completes, you will return to the main window and an Analysis Document will be
displayed. You will see your comparison analysis report as well as two tabs containing analysis charts for
the comparison data. You can now edit the analysis report/chart display options, such as logos, column
names, the attributes to display on the report, etc. by clicking your right mouse button on the report/chart
and selecting Edit Report/Chart Options or under the EDIT menu and OPTIONS.
6.
Once you are satisfied with the Analysis Report/Chart(s) you can select to print the current document or
Save to HTML for a report or Save to Image for a chart. You can also save a workspace to see the currently
displayed results when you open the workspace again.
How to write an analysis equation. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to write an analysis equation:
1.
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Equation Based Analysis button from
the list of Analysis Functions. Click the ADD button to create a new saved Equation Based Analysis or select
a saved analysis from the list.
3.
If creating a new analysis to save, the first step is to give a custom name and description to the new
analysis function. Click the NEXT> button to continue.
4.
The Set Analysis Result Type(s) dialog should now appear. This dialog allows you to define one or more
result datasets and attributes or temporary results such as sub-equations or prompts. Follow the steps below
for this dialog:
Analysis Results/Attributes to Generate from an Equation(s)
1.
Add an analysis result(s) and an attribute(s) to generate, giving the attributes names you can
easily identify and understand. These names will not be used anywhere else in the software and
are used only in the analysis function to help identify the analysis results and build the equations,
so you can give them the same name of the actual system attribute that you assign them to if you
want. Then you need to pick an existing attribute in your system to link your result attribute to.
Lastly, you can set the minimum and maximum ranges for your results as well as a rounding
value. Both of these settings help to validate your result values to acceptable values as well as
help limit the number of unique values that may be generated. Repeat this process for as many
result attributes as you want to generate. So if you want to create a prescription rate via an
equation, you would ADD one with a name of " LIME RATE" and a Description of "Equation for
generating lime rates".

Add multiple analysis results to build a multi-product prescription, i.e. a result for N, P ,
and K along with Target Rate attributes in each.
2.
Now assign the result attribute to the Prescription Attribute Group and the Target Rate (Mass)
attribute. Also make sure to set the units that the result attribute should be displayed as.
3.
Lastly, set an operation to default the result attribute to. This is important if you want the results to
be displayed and treated like a specific operation, so in the example above since we are creating
a prescription dataset, we would want to set the Result Operation to Fertilizing Prescription (Dry).
Temporary Results - Sub-Equations and Prompts (Optional)
1.
Add temporary results that can either be used within your equation to simplify them or as inputs
that you will be prompted for when you run the equation. The two types of temporary results
are:


120
Define Using Equation - This option creates a temporary result that you use to write a
sub-equation for that can then be inserted into your main equation as a symbol . You
simply add the temporary result name to your equation wherever you want the subequation to run and provide a result value to your main equation as it runs. It provides a
way to simplify your equations and reduce the amount of work you have to do to set up
complex equations.
Prompt for Value When Analysis is Run - This option allows you to define a temporary
result that you can insert into your equation as a symbol, like a regular attribute. The
difference is that when the equation is run, you will be prompted to enter in a value every
time a temporary result of this type is found. This is extremely useful when writing a
generate equation that has input values that vary by crop or even customer that the
equation is run for. So if you have a lime recommendation equation that had Yield Goal
How to ...
as one of its inputs you can define a temporary result called "Yield Goal" and when the
equation is run you will be asked to input a yield goal value which could be for soybeans,
corn, etc without having to make a special equation for each crop that you want to run the
equation on.
Once you have made the required selections click the NEXT> button.
5. The Select Analysis Input Datasets dialog should now appear. This dialog allows
you to select the data that will be used in your equation(s) to calculate results.
Two options for adding input datasets are provided:


Add Dataset - This option allows you to select any dataset from the system using the standard
Select Data Filter. Because you will be selecting multiple input datasets, which might be similar
in type, make sure to give them a descriptive name and description that you can easily identify
when you are building your equation(s).
Add All Datasets from Map - This option adds any datasets/layers that you have open in the
current map into the list of input datasets for analysis. This is very useful if you are editing,
viewing, etc datasets in a map and then decide that you want to write an analysis equation using
these datasets as inputs.
Once you have made your selections for inputs into your equation(s), click the NEXT> button.
6.
The Define Result Equation(s) dialog should now appear. This dialog is where you actually build your
equations for each of the analysis results and their attributes that you defined earlier. To build an equation,
select an analysis result or temporary result from the list at the top of the dialog and then use the provided
components to build an equation for each selection. See the help topic on the Define Result Equation(s)
dialog for a detailed explanation of the purpose and usage of the various selections and components on this
dialog.
A simple example of how you might build an equation follows:
The equation we want to build is one that states that if the Yield from a Grain harvest
dataset is below 50 bu/ac then we want to apply 100 lb/ac of Potash. If the Yield from a
Grain Harvest dataset is above 50 bu/ac then we only want to apply 50 lb/ac of Potash.
1.
In the Comment entry area type in the following description in the Comment box: "
Equation for potash recommendation using yield data and the rules if yield < 50 then
potash rate = 100 and if yield > 50 then lime rate = 50 ". Click the Add to Equation
button when done. This step is completely optional but it is recommended that you
add comments to your equations to help identify them at a later date, especially if
they are very complex.
2.
In the Equation Functions area click the IF button. This will automatically add the
base formatting for part of your equation.
3.
In the Variables/Spatial Functions area click the EDIT LIST button. Now select the
input Parameter (Input Dataset) that contains an attribute that you want to select an
attribute from, in this case a Grain Harvest dataset and the Estimated Volume (Dry)
(Yield) attribute. Add the selected attribute to the Symbols to Add list. Change the
ALIAS for the selected attribute to " Yield " . Click OK when done. Now click the
button labeled as the Yield attribute and it will be added to the equation after the IF
and ( that were already added.
4.
Now go back to the Equation Functions area and click the less than or equal to sign
( <= ) button.
5.
In the Constant Values area and click in the box below Enter Value and type in " 50
". Click the Add to Equation button.
6.
Click the empty row between the BEGIN and END functions. Now go back to the
Equation Functions area and then click the RESULT= button.
7.
In the Constant area click in the box below Enter Value and type in " 100 ". Click the
Add to Equation button.
8.
Now click the empty line below END in the equation area. In the Equation Functions
area click the ELSE IF button. This will automatically add the base formatting for part
of your equation.
9.
In the Variables/Spatial Functions area click the button labeled as the Yield
attribute and it will be added to the equation after the ELSE IF and ( that were already
added.
10. In the Equation Functions area click the greater than sign ( >) button.
121
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
11. Go back to the Constant area and click in the box below Enter Value and type in " 50
". Click the Add to Equation button.
12. Click the empty row between the BEGIN and END functions. Now go back to the
Equation Functions area and then click the RESULT= button.
13. In the Constant area click in the box below Enter Value and type in " 150 ". Click the
Add to Equation button.
14. Click the Validate button (the button to the right of the equation area with a large
green check mark on it. ). Once your equation is validated without any errors you can
click the FINISH button to automatically save your analysis function and then run it.
The end result should look something like this:
**Equation for potash recommendation using yield data and the rules if yield <= 50
then
potash rate = 100 and if yield > 50 then potash rate = 50 **
If ( Yield <= 50.00 ) Then
Begin
RESULT= 100.00
End
Else If ( Yield > 50.00 ) Then
Begin
RESULT= 150.00
End
7.
Your analysis function has now been created and saved automatically. To run the saved analysis function you
just built, make sure you select the function in the list of saved analysis' and then select either the Single Field
button or the Multiple Fields button to run your analysis. A dataset filter will now appear that will allow you to
select data from a single field or multiple fields depending on the option you selected. Click NEXT> once you
have selected your dataset filter, then review the datasets that have been found for use in your analysis and
then click FINISH run to the analysis.
8. The Analysis Editor will be displayed once the analysis completes, showing a
preview of the spatial dataset that was created. No editing is allowed in this editor
and its purpose is more for a visual check of your results before they are actually
saved into the system. Tooltips should also display as you move your cursor over
the grid cells on the map. At this point the data has not been saved and if you
click the CLOSE button your results will be lost and you will have to re-run the
analysis function to get a new analysis dataset. The mapped attribute can be
switched to show the result attributes that are created. A Dataset Name entry is
also provided where you can enter in a custom name that will be used to save the
dataset in the management tree.
9. Once you are satisfied with the results displayed and you want to save them into
the system, click the SAVE button.
10. The Management Selection dialog should not appear. Select where you would
like the analysis dataset saved and click the ACCEPT button.
11. You have now successfully created and saved an equation based analysis dataset
that can be mapped, printed, used in another analysis function such as an input to
another equation, etc.
How to generate a Multi-Year averages dataset. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate a Multi-year aggregated dataset:
1.
122
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
How to ...
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Multi-Year Averages Analysis button
from the list of Analysis Functions. Click the ADD button to create a new saved Multi-Year Averages
Analysis or select a saved analysis from the list.
3.
If creating a new analysis to save, the first step is to give a custom name and description to the new
analysis function. Click the NEXT> button to continue.
4.
You will now see the Select Data Filters dialog which will allow you to select the data you want included in
your analysis. Multi-Year Averages analysis is performed on a single field at a time (unless run in batch).
Once you have selected your dataset filters, click the NEXT> button.
5.
The Edit Data Filter Results dialog will now be displayed which provides a tree view of all the datasets that
met your filter selections on the previous dialog. You can remove any datasets that are listed that you do not
want to be included in the generation of your averages dataset. Click the NEXT> button once you are
satisfied with the datasets that will be used for the analysis.
6.
The Aggregate Options dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to select the attributes that you want
to generate a multi-year averages (aggregate) dataset for. The selected attributes can also be set to be
normalized, individually. Normalizing is very useful when you will be averaging data together from the same
operation but whose data ranges do not match, such as Soybean and Corn yields which are not directly
comparable in their normal form, but when normalized to a similar scale then they can be directly compared.
Two normalization methods are provided for you to select from. Once you have selected the attributes to
average and output results for, click the NEXT> button.
7.
The Grid Options dialog will now appear. You can select the Automatic Grid and Interpolation option and this
will set the optimum interpolation settings for each dataset that is processed. You can select Restore
Defaults, and this will reset any custom interpolation settings that have been saved for that Operation. If you
want a manual selection, enter the desired settings. Smaller grids will provide finer detail but will also take
longer to process and also may show more holes in the dataset if your input data does not provide full or
complete coverage of your field. Larger grids will process much faster but also will result in more smoothing
of data thus providing less detail in your dataset. You also can set the interpolation parameters for the
generation of the results. Here again the larger the interpolation distance the smoother your data will look
but you will start to lose detail and smaller profit/loss changes across your field. Once you have made the
desired settings click the FINISH button to generate your analysis dataset.
8.
Your analysis function has now been created and saved automatically. To run the saved analysis function
you just built, make sure you select the function in the list of saved analysis' and then select either the Single
Field button or the Multiple Fields button to run your analysis. A dataset filter will now appear that will allow
you to select data from a single field or multiple fields depending on the option you selected. Click NEXT>
once you have selected your dataset filter, then review the datasets that have been found for use in your
analysis and then click FINISH run to the analysis.
9.
The Analysis Editor will be displayed once the analysis completes, showing a preview of the spatial dataset
that was created. No editing is allowed in this editor and its purpose is more for a visual check of your results
before they are actually saved into the system. Tooltips should be displayed as you move your cursor over
the grid cells on the map. At this point the data has not been saved and if you click the CLOSE button your
results will be lost and you will have to re-run the analysis function to get a new analysis dataset. The
mapped attribute can be switched to show the result attributes that are created. A Dataset Name entry is
also provided where you can enter in a custom name that will be used to save the dataset in the
management tree.
10. Once you are satisfied with the results displayed and you want to save them into the system, click the SAVE
button.
11.
The Management Selection dialog should now appear. Select where you would like the multi-year averages
dataset saved and click the ACCEPT button.
12. You have now successfully created and saved an multi-year averages dataset that can be mapped, printed,
used in another analysis function such as an input to an equation, etc.
How to generate a Profit/Loss dataset. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate a Profit/Loss dataset:
1.
First, make sure that you have added some Financial Tracking entries so that you will actually get results
when you run the Profit/Loss analysis wizard.
2.
Now go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
3.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Profit/Loss Analysis button from the
list of Analysis Functions. This analysis function does not support saving custom settings/setup. To run this
analysis function select either the Single Field button or the Multiple Fields button to run it.
4.
You will now see the Select Data Filters dialog which will allow you to select the data you want included in
your analysis. Profit/Loss analysis is a single field at a time (unless multiple fields was selected) so all
selections will filter you down to a single field to be used for the analysis. Once you have selected your
dataset filters, click the NEXT> button.
123
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
5.
The Edit Data Filter Results dialog will now be displayed and provides a tree view of all the datasets that met
your filter selections on the previous dialog. You can remove any datasets that are listed that you do not
want to be included in the generation of your Profit/Loss dataset. Click the NEXT> button once you are
satisfied with the datasets that will be used for the analysis.
6.
The Grid Options dialog will now appear. You can select to use Automatic grid and interpolation, and this will
evaluate each dataset that is used for the Profit/Loss Analysis function and select the optimum settings for
each layer. If you chose you can also uncheck the option and use the manual settings. This allows you to
set the size of the grids that will be used to generate your profit/loss data. Smaller grids will provide finer
detail but will also take longer to process and also may show more holes in the dataset if your input data
does not provide full or complete coverage of your field. Larger grids will process much faster but also will
result in more smoothing of data thus providing less detail in your dataset. You also can set the interpolation
parameters for the generation of the results. Here again the larger the interpolation distance the smoother
your data will look but you will start to lose detail and smaller profit/loss changes across your field. Once you
have made the desired settings click the FINISH button to generate your profit/loss dataset.
7.
The Analysis Editor will be displayed once the analysis completes, showing a preview of the spatial dataset
that was created. No editing is allowed in this editor and its purpose is more for a visual check of your results
before they are actually saved into the system. Tooltips should also display as you move your cursor over
the grid cells on the map. At this point the data has not been saved and if you click the CLOSE button your
results will be lost and you will have to re-run the analysis function to get a new analysis dataset. The
mapped attribute can be switched to show the three attributes that are created for a profit/loss dataset;
Expense, Income, and Profit/Loss. A Dataset Name entry is also provided where you can enter in a custom
name that will be used to save the dataset in the management tree.
8.
Once you are satisfied with the results displayed and you want to save them into the system, click the SAVE
button.
9.
The Management Selection dialog should now appear. Select where you would like the profit/loss dataset
saved and click the ACCEPT button.
10. You have now successfully created and saved an profit/loss dataset that can be mapped, printed, used in
another analysis function such as an input to an equation, etc.
How to generate an NDVI dataset. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate an NDVI dataset:
1.
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the NDVI Analysis button from the list of
Analysis Functions. This analysis function does not support saving custom settings/setup. To run
this analysis function select either the Single Field button or the Multiple Fields button to run it.
3.
You will now see the Select Data Filters dialog which will allow you to select the data you want included in
your analysis. NDVI analysis only supports input of image (raster) datasets for the analysis process, so the
filter will automatically limit you to image datasets that you have in your system. Once you have selected
your dataset filters, click the NEXT> button.
4.
The Edit Data Filter Results dialog will now be displayed and provides a tree view of all the datasets that met
your filter selections on the previous dialog. You can remove any datasets that are listed that you do not
want to be included in the generation of your NDVI dataset. Click the NEXT> button once you are satisfied
with the datasets that will be used for the analysis.
5.
The NDVI Settings dialog should now appear. This dialog allows you to set the output grid size for the
analysis of the image as well as the settings for the color bands to use from your image to use in the NDVI
calculation.


Set Output Grid Size - Allows you to either select resolution of the raster cells that make up the
input image as the resolution to use for your NDVI dataset, or to manually enter a grid size. The
trade-off between these selections is strictly related to resolution you want the end result to have,
the time it will take to generate, and the size of the final result dataset. A finer resolution will take
longer to process and map as well as use more memory.
Select Color Bands for Processing - This analysis function takes an RGB image as an input and
not the raw NIR imagery that was originally created. That being the case you must assign the
color bands from your input image that correspond to the NIR bands of the original raw data. The
provider of the imagery files should advise which color bands ( Red, Green, or Blue) map to the
NIR band and the Visible Red Band. The default settings (Green and Red) that the dialog starts
with are the most common mapping of color bands by most imagery sources.
Once you have made the grid and band settings/selections, click the FINISH button.
6.
124
The Analysis Editor will be displayed once the analysis completes, showing a preview of the spatial dataset
that was created. No editing is allowed in this editor and its purpose is more for a visual check of your results
before they are actually saved into the system. Tooltips should also be displayed as you move your cursor
over the grid cells on the map. At this point the data has not been saved and if you click the CLOSE button
your results will be lost and you will have to re-run the analysis function to get a new analysis dataset. The
How to ...
mapped attribute can be switched to show the result attributes that are created. For an NDVI dataset, two
attributes are created; the NDVI (dimensionless) and NIR Vigor (also known as Vigor) attributes are created
in the new dataset. A Dataset Name entry is also provided where you can enter in a custom name that will
be used to save the dataset in the management tree.
7.
Once you are satisfied with the results displayed and you want to save them into the system, click the SAVE
button.
8.
The Management Selection dialog should not appear. Select where you would like the NDVI dataset saved
and click the ACCEPT button.
9.
You have now successfully created and saved an NDVI dataset that can be mapped, printed, used in
another analysis function such as an input to an equation, etc.
How to generate a terrain analysis dataset. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to generate a terrain analysis dataset:
1.
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Analysis Wizard.
2.
The Select Analysis Type to Run dialog should now appear. Select the Terrain Analysis button from the list
of Analysis Functions. This analysis function does not support saving custom settings/setup. To run
this analysis function select either the Single Field button or the Multiple Fields button to run it.
3.
You will now see the Select Data Filters dialog which will allow you to select the data you want included in
your analysis. Terrain analysis is performed on a single field at a time (unless multiple fields was selected).
Once you have selected your dataset filters, click the FINISH button.
4.
The Analysis Editor will be displayed once the analysis completes, showing a preview of the spatial dataset
that was created. No editing is allowed in this editor and its purpose is more for a visual check of your results
before they are actually saved into the system. Tooltips should also be displayed as you move your cursor
over the grid cells on the map. At this point the data has not been saved and if you click the CLOSE button
your results will be lost and you will have to re-run the analysis function to get a new analysis dataset. The
mapped attribute can be switched to show the result attributes that are created. For a terrain analysis
dataset a number of attributes are created; Slope/Grade (raw) (dimensionless), Gradient Direction
(degrees), Curvature, Drainage Area, Drainage Intensity (dimensionless), Flow Direction (degrees),
Landscape Position, Stream Power (dimensionless), and Wetness Potential (dimensionless). A Dataset
Name entry is also provided where you can enter in a custom name that will be used to save the dataset in
the management tree.
5.
Once you are satisfied with the results displayed and you want to save them into the system, click the SAVE
button.
6.
The Management Selection dialog should now appear. Select where you would like the slope dataset saved
and click the ACCEPT button.
7.
You have now successfully created and saved a terrain analysis dataset that can be mapped, printed, used
in another analysis function such as an input to an equation, etc.
How to search for spatial data using the Spatial Data Finder. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to run the spatial data finder to find spatial data:
1.
Go to the Analysis Menu and select Spatial Data Finder.
2.
The Spatial Filter Type Selection dialog will appear. This dialog displays the current spatial filter groups and
filters that are in your system and allows you to select a filter to run, edit, delete or to create a new spatial
map or layers.



To create a new spatial filter click the Add New... button.
To create a new spatial filter that is based on an existing spatial filter that you want to modify and
save a unique version of, click the Add Copy... button.
i.
The Name/Description dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you set various
descriptive items related to your new spatial filter. Click the NEXT> button once you are
finished with the entries.
ii.
The Select Spatial Filter Items dialog will now appear. Select the items that you would like
to use to filter spatial data with. Also you must select a merge level for the spatial results
using one of the items you have selected for your filter. Click the FINISH button when
finished.
iii.
You will now return to the Spatial Filter Type Selection dialog. Your new spatial filter will
now be listed under the Spatial Filter Group that you selected.
3.
Select your spatial filter and click the NEXT> button to run it.
4.
Use the filters on the next dialog to select the desired information to return to map.
125
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
5.
The filter results dialog will now appear to show the datasets found by your filter. Click NEXT> to continue on
with the datasets found by the filter.
6.
The Spatial Filter Results dialog will now appear showing a preview map of the results. You have the option
to either add the results to the currently active map or create a new map with the results. Click FINISH to
map the results.
How to save a workspace.
Follow these steps to save a workspace:
1.
Go to the File menu and select Save Workspace or Save As Workspace. Use Save Workspace to override
the current workspace if there is one. Use Save As Workspace to save your work as a separate workspace,
which allows you to have multiple workspaces.
2.
Depending on the option selected above and whether a workspace is currently in use already, you will be
asked to enter a name to save the workspace file as.
3.
Click Save.
Note:
Workspaces are not to be used for backing up system data. Workspaces do not actually store any data, but instead
store locations and links to data that was open when the workspace was saved. To properly create backups of the
data you have in the system, go to the Services menu and select Backup and perform a backup of your system which
can be used to fully restore your data that was in the system at the time of the backup.
How to open a workspace.
Follow these steps to open a saved workspace:
1.
Go to the File menu and select Open Workspace or Recent Workspaces.
2.
If you selected Open Workspace, you will get an Open dialog with a list of the workspaces that you have
saved and can open. Select a file and click Open. Your saved workspace should now open.
3.
If you selected Recent Workspaces, you will now see a second menu listing the workspaces that have been
recently saved or opened. Select a workspace from this list and it will open automatically.
1.
Double click on an software workspace icon.
2.
The software will automatically start and load the saved workspace that you selected.
or
Note:
If you have removed data from the system that was part of a saved workspace that you try to open, the information
that was removed will be ignored when the software tries to restore the map(s) and layer(s) that were open when you
saved the workspace. The deleted data will not restore when you open the workspace. Workspaces are not for backup
purposes. The Backup option under the Services menu should be used to make a proper and fully restorable backup
of your system data.
How to geo-reference an Image.
Follow these steps to geo-reference an imported image file:
1.
Select data from the Management tree and create a map to use as a reference for the image that will be
imported or have (3) Lat./Lon. points ready to use for referencing the image.
2.
From the File Menu, select Import and then Image File…
3.
Now using the Open File dialog, select the location and name of the image file to be imported and click
Open.
4.
Follow the instructions on the Image Geo-reference window and click Accept after you have selected three
reference points in each selection window or keyed in (3) Lat./Lon. points.
5.
The Image Clipping Options dialog will no appear. Select one of the clipping options for the image you are
importing and then click the Next> button.
6.
Now the Image Import Settings dialog will appear and you must select a management type for the image,
either Management Tree, Background, or Temporary reference for the Boundary Editor. Once you have
made you selections click the FINISH button.


126
If the Background option was selected then you can select the image as a background through the
Map menu. To do this, select the Set Background… icon on the Map toolbar or go to the Map
menu and select Set Background and then select the image to use as a background.
If the Management Tree selection was made then enter in the required management selections
and then click Accept.
How to ...

7.
If the Temporary Reference option was selected then the Boundary Editor will automatically open
and have the image displayed as a background layer while the editor is open.
The image can now be selected from the management tree and added as a map layer or selected for display
as a background, or used temporarily in the Boundary Editor.
How to download imagery from the internet
The software actually provides two ways to get imagery type data from the internet. You can either use the download
wizard to download aerial imagery only that can be used temporarily, saved into your management tree, or saved as a
background. Or the other option is to enable aerial/road map data to dynamically download as a special background
for a map you are viewing. You are not restricted to one or the other either, both can be used.
If you want to download a specific aerial image and have more control over the quality and manage it, follow these
steps to download imagery from the internet:
1.
From the File Menu, select Import and then Download Imagery From Internet..
2.
The Internet Imagery Download Options dialog will now appear. There are 3 possible options available for
selecting a location to download imagery for:



Farm(s) or Field(s) - Uses existing Farms and Fields in your system as a reference to download
imagery. You must select a specific Grower to give you a preview of what images are available for
your selected Grower.
Latitude and Longitude - Allows the entry of a specific location to download imagery for. Imagery
will be available for download within 25 square miles of the entered location.
Use Selected Location - Allows the entry of a City and State or Country and returns a spatial point
at that location. Imagery will be available for download within 25 square miles of the location.
Click OK once you have made your selection.
3.
The Select an Image Source dialog will now appear. This dialog provides a preview of available image
sources that are available for the location you picked in the step above. The sample images shown are
provided at the maximum resolution available at the location you picked. You can select each source to see
a preview of it. Once you decide which image source you want to use to download imagery from, make sure
to have that source selected and then click OK.
NOTE: No warranty or guarantee of imagery quality or availability is made when using this feature.
Downloaded imagery is made available for the users own private use only and is not to be used for resale
or commercial purposes.
4.
The Image Clipping Options dialog will now appear. Select one of the clipping options for the image you are
importing and then click the Next> button.
5.
Depending on the download option you selected in step 2, you will either get a Select Data Filters dialog to
filter the data that imagery will be downloaded for or you will get the Manually Clip Image dialog which
allows you to manually draw the area(s) that you want to import imagery from. In either process click NEXT>
once you have made your selection(s).
6.
Now the Image Import Settings dialog will appear and you must select a management type for the image,
either Management Tree, Background, or Temporary reference for the Boundary Editor. Once you have
made you selections click the FINISH button.
7.
1.
If you select the Background option then you can also select an option to automatically set the
background as a linked background for either a Farm or Field.
2.
If the Management Tree selection was made then enter in the required management selections
and then click Accept.
3.
If the Temporary Reference option was selected then the Boundary Editor will automatically open
and have the image displayed as a background layer while the editor is open.
The image(s) can now be selected from the management tree and added as a map layer or selected for
display as a background, or used temporarily in the Boundary Editor.
If you want to just see aerial/road map data as a background for your data without any additional settings or saving it to
you system, follow these steps to enable automatic downloading and display of aerial/road map data in your map(s);
1.
Select the data in your management tree that you wish to map and see aerial/road map background data
with.
2.
Create a new map of the data or add it to an existing map.
3.
By default, a special background layer will be added, if you have an internet connection, that is a
combination of an aerial image and a road map. From the Map toolbar or menu you can select to not show
this special background, show only the aerial map, show only the road map, or show the combination. The
default type that is used when creating maps can also be set in General Options on the Mapping 1 tab.
127
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
NOTE: These special backgrounds that are automatically downloaded for you are very easy and
convenient to use, but they do provide less control over the quality of the images compared to the
first method above. It is likely that day to day that you may see different imagery based on what is
the most accurate/available imagery for your map you are viewing.
NOTE: These special internet based backgrounds can also be enabled in print layouts so that you
can automatically get background imagery/road maps for data you are printing even though you
don't have anything saved or setup ahead of time for the data you are printing.
How to set a map background(s).
Follow these steps to add a data layer to the current map:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
2.
Go to the Map menu and select Set Background or select the Set Background icon on the Map toolbar.
3.
The Set Background dialog will now appear. Click on the Add Background… button.
4.
The Add Background dialog will now appear. Select a tab, either spatial or image. Then select a file from the
list of files that are available based on the tab selected.
5.
Click OK after making your selection(s). You will now return to the Set Background dialog.
6.
If multiple backgrounds are selected to add to the map you can use the Up or Down arrow icons to move a
selected background up or down in the list, or delete a selected background from the list.
7.
Click OK once you have the background(s) you would like to see on your map listed in the window.
8.
The background(s) should now appear in the back of the map window, as the bottom layer below any other
layers in the Layer window.
Note: Backgrounds can’t be added if there is not a layer already open in the map window.
In addition to the steps above or on its own you can also enable a special background that is internet based and
downloads dynamically for your current map or print layout. This option can be used with the steps above or on its
own. Follow the steps below to display a special background layer on your map:
1.
Select the data in your management tree that you wish to map and see aerial/road map background data
with.
2.
Create a new map of the data or add it to an existing map.
3.
By default, a special background layer will be added, if you have an internet connection, that is a
combination of an aerial image and a road map. From the Map toolbar or menu you can select to not show
this special background, show only the aerial map, show only the road map, or show the combination. The
default type that is used when creating maps can also be set in General Options on the Mapping 1 tab.
NOTE: These special backgrounds that are automatically downloaded for you are very easy and
convenient to use, but they do provide less control over the quality of the images compared to the
first method above. It is likely that day to day that you may see different imagery based on what is
the most accurate/available imagery for your map you are viewing.
NOTE: These special internet based backgrounds can also be enabled in print layouts so that you
can automatically get background imagery/road maps for data you are printing even though you
don't have anything saved or setup ahead of time for the data you are printing.
How to manually move a Farm.
Follow these steps to move the data from one Farm to another Farm:
1.
Select the farm you would like to move in the Management tree and click on it to highlight it.
2.
Click on the right mouse button and select Edit Item from the menu that appears.
3.
Select the Grower that you would like to move the Farm under and click OK.
4.
You will now be prompted to select whether or not you would like this change to only apply to new data you
read in or if you would like the change to affect data you have already read in as well as new data that you
read in. Once you have made your selection click OK.
5.
The Management Tree will now update and the change should be visible once you open the tree up or the
next time you read new data in for the moved field.
How to create a Job and Task(s).
Follow these steps to create a Job and Task(s):
1.
128
Go to the Tools Menu and select Job Viewer or select the Job Viewer button form the Main Toolbar.
How to ...
2.
The Job Viewer should now be displayed. Click the ADD button.
3.
The Job Editor dialog should now appear. Enter a Name and Description for the Job. Then select a Year that you
want to add the Job to. Now define a time span for the Job. You now have a few options for defining your Task(s).

Assign Tasks using a Template (recommended method) - This option allows you to define a Task template
that can be used to create new Tasks automatically or sort data to existing Tasks that have been defined.
Follow these steps to define a Task template:
1.
Click the ADD button next to the Task Templates list box.
2.
The Define Task Sorting Template dialog should now be displayed. Enter a Name and Description
for the Task Template. Set a time span for the Tasks that the template will apply to. Then pick an
Operation Pair(s) that the template will use to decide what datasets should be included in new or
existing Tasks. Lastly, set the management item filters to define what data in the system to look
through when sorting data to Tasks.
3.
Click OK once you have defined the template.
4.
Now click the Sort Datasets to the Tasks for this Job button and the templates that you have
defined for the Job will run and either update existing Tasks if they already exist and new data is
available or new Tasks will be created if datasets matching the template are found.
NOTE: Once a Task Template(s) is defined for a Job, the system will automatically check all data you
read into the system via the Open or Open Card options to see if they contain data that should be added to
created as new Tasks based on the defined template(s). To prevent data being sorted to Tasks in a Job,
you must either make sure you defined your templates to be very specific or you can set the Job and/or
Task as completed, which means that the system will ignore them when sorting.

Manually Assign Tasks - This option allows you to manually define the datasets that are linked to your Task,
its time span, etc. Follow these steps to manually add a Task:
1.
Click the ADD button on the Job Editor.
2.
The Task Editor should now be displayed. Enter a name and description for you Task. Then select
the Grower/Farm/Field that the Task will apply to. A Task can only apply to a single field. Now
define the time span for the Task. Now click the Define task Components button. Pick an
Operational Pair for the Task and click OK. Next pick an option for when you have multiple
products and click NEXT>. Now select a Planned Dataset(s), if appropriate, and click NEXT>.
Lastly, pick an Actual Dataset(s) and click FINISH.
3.
Your Operational Pair of Planned and Actual datasets should now we listed in the Task Details
tree.
4.
Repeat step 2-3 for each operation that you plan to occur during this Task.
5.
Click OK once you feel you have defined your Task completely.
4.
Once you have defined your Job you can click OK.
5.
Now your Job should be visible in the Job Viewer when you set the Year filter to the year that you added the Job
to. Click CLOSE to exit.
6.
Go to the Job/Task Tree tab. Your Job and Task(s) should be listed in the tree by Year. When a level in this tree
is selected you should see a summary for the level selected. At the Job and Task levels you will see a summary
that displays the Planned, Actual, % Difference values for the data linked to the Job and Task. The Calendar
View will also display the Job based on the time span you set and provide a summary of the Tasks that are
linked to that Job.
How to export a Job.
Follow these steps to export a Job to a field device:
1.
Select a Job in the Job/Task Tree or go to the Job Viewer in the Tools Menu.
2.
If you are in the Job/Task Tree, right click your mouse button and select Export Job from the menu that appears. If
you are on the Job Viewer, select a Job and click Export.
3.
The Select Job Export Format dialog should now be displayed. Select an export format, select the option to also
export setup information if desired, and then click OK. Now depending on the format that you selected for export
and the Planned Dataset(s) that you had assigned to the Tasks associated to the Job, you will be prompted for all
the required options for exporting the planned data that is tied to the Tasks in the Job. For example, your
prescriptions will be exported now, followed by your device setup information if you selected that option.
4.
Depending on the file format, you should now be prompted for locations to store various export files associated
with your Job and Task(s).
How to manually move a Field.
Using Edit Item:
Use the following steps and movie to move a field and its links permanently to another Farm and or Grower.
129
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Follow these steps to move a Field to another Farm and/or Grower:
1.
Select the field you would like to move in the Management Tree and click on it to highlight it.
2.
Click on the right mouse button and select Edit Item from the menu that appears.
3.
Now select the Grower and Farm that you would like to move the Field under and click OK.
4.
You will now be prompted to select whether or not you would like this change to only apply to new data you
read in or if you would like the change to affect data you have already read in as well as new data that you
read in. Once you have made your selection click OK.
5.
The Management Tree will now update and the change should be visible once you open the tree up or the
next time you read new data in for the moved field.
Merging Fields:
Use the following steps and movie to merge two fields together, and permanently change the links for the merged field
to the new field.
Follow these steps to move a Field to another Farm and/or Grower:
1.
Select a field that you would like to merge into another field.
2.
Click the right mouse button and select Merge Fields. The Merge Fields dialog will now appear.
3.
Select the Grower, Farm, and then Field from the tree that you would like to merge the selected field with.
4.
Click OK.
5.
The field has now been merged with the field you selected from the tree.
Note: Future data entered into the system that has a link to data already in the system that has been merged will
automatically link to the merged location and not the original locations.
How to manually move other management items (Year, Load, etc.).
Follow these steps to manually reassign the management information for a selected item in the Management Tree:
Note: The changes made using Move Branch are only for information currently in the Management Tree and does not
change how new data will be handled. Edit Item, Merge Field, or Spatial Sorter must be used to effect new data read
into the system.
1.
Select an item from the Management Tree and click on it to highlight it.
2.
Click on the right mouse button and select Move Branch from the menu that appears.
3.
A message dialog will now appear warning about the usage of Move Branch. Click OK.
4.
The Select Management dialog is now visible with certain items grayed out depending on which item you
selected from the Management Tree. Select an item you would like to change, add, or edit and make the
appropriate selection.
5.
Once you have made all the Management changes you would like, click Accept.
6.
The change should now appear in the Management Tree.
How to spatially sort Fields into Farms.
Follow these steps to set a Farm boundary and sort your fields into the proper farms based on the boundaries that are
set:
1.
Click on a Grower(s) in the Management Tree and click the Create New Map button below the Management
Tree or go to the Map menu and select Create Map for Selection.
2.
A boundary map of the fields under the selected Grower(s) will be created.
3.
Go to the File Menu and select New and then Boundary or click on the New Boundary icon on the Map
Toolbar.
4.
Use the tools provided in the Boundary Edit toolbar to create a boundary(s) around the fields that you would
like to have sorted into a farm.
5.
Once you are done creating an area to represent a farm, click the Set Farm Boundary button. Now enter in
the management information for the farm that you would like the boundary to be associated with.
6.
Click Accept when done.
7.
Now click Close on the Boundary Edit window.
8.
Go to the Tools Menu and select Spatial Sorter and then Sort Fields by Farm.
9.
Your fields that fall within the defined farm boundary(s) will be sorted so that they now appear under that
farm. When completed the dialog will indicate how many fields were moved.
10. Clicking on the Farm that a boundary was created for will now generate a boundary map of the farm and
associated fields in the Preview Window.
130
How to ...
Note: If any fields contained data without GPS, then this information was not sorted and needs to be manually moved.
See Manually Moving a Field to perform this action.
How to spatially sort Loads/Regions into Fields.
Follow these steps to create fixed boundaries for your fields and sort your load/region data into the proper place based
on the field boundaries that are set:
1.
Collect boundary files with the Ag Leader PF3000/PF3000 Pro (BDY’s) or some other logging device and
read them into the system. When the boundary file(s) are read into the system you will need to create
management information for each boundary, including Grower, Farm, and Field names.
2.
Select each Field that a boundary file was loaded for and select all the way down to the boundary dataset in
the tree. Click the right mouse button and select Set as Field Boundary from the menu that pops up.
3.
Once the boundary file(s) have been loaded in and set, start reading in your files created and ignore setting
the Archiving Options. The same can be done for imported data such as soil type maps, etc.
4.
Once you have read in all your data, go to the Tools menu and select Spatial Sorter and then Sort Loads by
Field.
5.
The software will now start sorting your all GPS/spatial data based on its geographic location and the
boundary files that were read in.
6.
Once completed the dialog will indicate how many loads/regions were moved.
7.
If any fields contained data without GPS, then this information was not sorted and needs to be manually
moved. See Manually Moving a Field to perform this action.
1.
Read a complete season’s worth of data into the system that contains complete GPS information for all the
fields that you farm.
2.
Once all the data is read into the system, select the first field in the Management Tree and then click the
right mouse button and select Freeze Boundary from the menu that pops up.
3.
Repeat this step for all fields in the Management Tree that you want to sort data for. You can also select at
the Grower and Farm levels to freeze all the Field Boundaries below the selection. Batch Freezing of
multiple Growers and Farms can also be done through the Batch Command Utility.
Or
4.
Once all fields have been set, go to the Tools Menu and select Spatial Sorter and then Sort Loads by Field.
5.
The software will now start sorting your data based on its geographic location and the frozen boundaries
6.
Once completed the dialog will indicate how many loads were moved.
Note: If any fields contained data without GPS, then this information was not sorted and needs to be manually moved.
See Manually Moving a Field to perform this action.
How to split and sort a load or region.
Follow these steps to split a load/region and then sort it into the proper field:
Note: Only loads or regions that have been logged to the wrong field should be split. One side effect of splitting data is
that the monitor summary information is lost for a load or region that has been split. This also means that new
calibration cards or changes can not be applied to this data. Splitting loads or regions should only be done after you
have read in all the data that will effect the load if you want to make sure that the latest calibration information has
been applied to it prior to sorting. Also, if you reprocess files that contain data for the split load/region, the load/region
will be added back into the system like it was before you split it. This can be useful if you make a mistake and want to
get your data back to where it was before you split it.
1.
Freeze or set the boundaries for all the fields that need to be used to split and sort loads/regions. See How
to freeze a boundary. or How to create a boundary.
2.
Select a single load or region from the Management Tree. Only one load or region and be split at a time.
3.
Click on the right mouse button. A menu of options will appear.
4.
Select the Split Loads / Region option.
5.
The software will now check the data contained in load/region and compare its location to the boundaries
that you have frozen or set. If a load/region partially falls within a boundary, the points that are within the
boundary will be split and a new load will be added to the field that they fall into.
6.
Once completed the software will report how many datasets were searched and how many loads/regions
were split and sorted.
7.
Any loads/regions that were split, even the original load/region, are now spatially based only and do not
have monitor summaries and can’t be calibrated by new calibration files.
How to query a single layer.
131
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Follow these steps to query the data on a single map layer:
1.
Select the layer to be queried in the Layer Window and make it active by clicking on its title bar.
2.
From the Map menu, select Select Type and then either Select Object or Select Intersection or click on the
Select Type icon in Map toolbar and choose one of the options.
3.
Now select a selection tool from the Map menu by selection Select Tool and then choosing one of the tools
or click on the Select Tools icon in the Map toolbar and choose one of the options.
4.
Based on the selected type and tool make a selection on the active layer/map.
5.
Once the selection is made go to the Map menu, select Query Tools and then Query Current Layer or click
on the Query Current Layer icon on the Map Toolbar.
6.
A numbered query result will now be displayed in a window that appears inside the Map window, labeled
Query Results. These results can be printed by going to the File Menu and selecting Print and then Query
Results.
7.
Click the Reset Cursor icon on the Map Toolbar or select a different tool to clear any selections and
deactivate the selection tool. To clear the contents of the Query Results window go to the Map menu and
select Query Tools and then Clear Query Results or select the Clear Query Results icon from the Map
Window Toolbar.
8.
To hide the Map Summary window click on the Hide/Show Properties icon on the Map Toolbar or go to the
Map menu and select Hide/Show Properties.
How to query multiple layers.
Follow these steps to query the data on multiple layers of a map:
1.
From the Map menu, select Select Type and then either Select Object or Select Intersection or click on the
Select Type icon on the Map toolbar and choose one of the options.
2.
Now select a selection tool from the Map menu by selection Select Tool and then choosing one of the tools
or click on the Select Tools icon in the Map toolbar and choose one of the options.
3.
Based on the selected tool make a selection on the active layer/map.
4.
If you wish to not include all layers in the query, go to the Map menu and select Query Tools and then Select
Query Layers. Check the layers to be queried and click OK.
5.
Once the selection is made go to the Map menu, click Query Tools and then Query Through Current Layer
or Query Multiple Layers or click on the Query Through Current Layer icon or the Query Multiple Layers icon
on the Map Window Toolbar.
6.
A numbered query result will now be displayed in a window that appears inside the Map window, labeled
Query Results. These results can be printed by going to the File Menu and selecting Print and then Query
Results.
7.
Click the Reset Cursor icon on the Map Toolbar or select a different tool to clear any selections and
deactivate the selection tool. To clear the contents of the Query Results window go to the Map menu and
select Query Tools and then Clear Query Results or select the Clear Query Results icon from the Map
Window Toolbar.
8.
To hide the Map Summary window click on the Hide/Show Properties icon on the Map Toolbar or go to the
Map menu and select Hide/Show Properties.
How to export a bitmap or other image file type.
Follow these steps to export a bitmap or other image file type from the software:
1.
Select and/or map data from the Management Tree. If you export from the management tree the image will
be created based on a WGS84 Lat/Lon projection. If you export from a map, you will get an image that was
based on the projection of the current map. (Exported images do not include the legend for the map.)
2.
Go to the File menu and select Export. The Select an Export Method... dialog will now appear.
3.
Now select the Image format button and then one of the image formats from the list and click the export
button.
4.
The Image settings dialog will now appear. If you wish to change the output resolution of the image, you can
enter in your own pixel resolution for the output image. The larger the pixel size the larger the image file size
will be. Click OK to continue.
5.
Select a location and name for the image file to be saved.
6.
Click Save.
How to import an image file.
132
1.
Go to the FILE menu or the main toolbar and select READ FILE(S)...
2.
A dialog will now appear with three options on it for reading files into the software. To import files from a
generic source, select the third option IMPORT A FILE FROM A GENERIC SOURCE. The option is selected
How to ...
if there is a green check mark over the top right corner of the file icon. Once the option is selected, click the
START IMPORTING GENERIC FILES... button.
3.
A dialog will now appear that provides a list of the file formats or groups of formats that can be imported.
Select the button labeled as IMAGES...
4.
From the Open dialog, select your image file. Click Open once you make your selection.
5.
Depending on the image you select and its formatting, you may have to manually geo-reference the image if
the geo-referencing is not included with the file.
6.
The Image Clipping Options dialog will now appear. Select one of the clipping options for the image you are
importing and then click the Next> button.
7.
If the image has more than 3 bands, or data embedded in the image bands for data like crop health, you will
get options to assign the additional data to attributes within SMS.
8.
Now the Image Import Settings dialog will appear and you must select a management type for the image,
either Management Tree, Background, or Temporary reference for the Boundary Editor. Once you have
made you selections click the FINISH button.

If the Background option was selected then you can select the image as a background through the
Map menu. To do this, select the Set Background… icon on the Map toolbar or go to the Map
menu and select Set Background and then select the image to use as a background.

If the Management Tree selection was made then enter in the required management selections
and then click Accept.

9.
If the Temporary Reference option was selected then the Boundary Editor will automatically open
and have the image displayed as a background layer while the editor is open.
The image can now be selected from the management tree and added as a map layer or selected for display
as a background, or used temporarily in the Boundary Editor.
How to import an ESRI Shape, MapInfo Mid/Mif, DEM, or TIGER file.
Follow these steps to import an ESRI Shape, MapInfo Mid/Mif, DEM, or TIGER file into the system:
1.
Now go to the FILE menu or the main toolbar and select READ FILE(S)...
2.
A dialog will now appear with three options on it for reading files into the software. To import files from a
generic source, select the third option IMPORT A FILE FROM A GENERIC SOURCE. The option is selected
if there is a green check mark over the top right corner of the file icon. Once the option is selected, click the
START IMPORTING GENERIC FILES... button.
3.
A dialog will now appear that provides a list of the file formats or groups of formats that can be imported.
Select one of the buttons that is labeled with the format name you wish to import or the type of file you want
to import.. Then click the SELECT FILE(S) TO IMPORT... button.
4.
Now the Open dialog will appear and allow you to select the file you will import. Click Open once you make
your selection.
5.
A preview map of the data contained in the selected file will now be displayed, if correct click the Next>
button to continue, otherwise click Cancel to exit the import process. Data displayed in the preview is
unprojected.
6.
Now select a Data Type and a Management Type for the imported data. The Data Type selection will
depend on the type of data being imported. If it is point data then you can import it as any of the types in the
system such as Grain Harvest or Application Rate. If the file contains data formatted as a polygon or polyline then the type can only be Generic, such as TIGER files. For the Management Type, you can select to
import the data and manage/display it in the Management Tree or use it as a Background only, which means
it will not be selectable from the Management Tree. You can also select to have the imported data clipped to
frozen boundaries in the system, all other data in the import file will be ignored. Click Next> once you make
these selections.
7.
If you selected to manage the data in the Management Tree you can now select specific attributes that can
mapped in the system, if desired. Once the desired attributes have been selected, the Save Template button
can be used to save the column settings as a custom template for future use. Click Next> when done. If you
selected to import the data as a background ignore this step and click Next>.
8.
Now select the management information for the imported data then click Next>. If you selected to import the
data as a background this step will be skipped. Also, if you selected the Clip to Boundaries option then you
will only be required to set the Year, Operation, Product, and Operational Instance. Grower, Farm, and Field
will automatically be set based on the boundary that the data falls into when it is clipped.
9.
Click Finish.
Notes on importing Selection List data:

Selection Lists contain data that you want to use again and again to provide consistency in your
data that you collect and work with. So an example would be a list of weather conditions; Sunny,
Cloudy, Rainy, etc. for example. The software does some rather unique and help tasks behind
133
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
the scenes to help you with building and maintaining Selection Lists. If you import an attribute
from a file and set it to the attribute in the system that has a Data Type of Selection List, the
software will take the values in the imported data and convert each unique value in the data to a
Selection List entry. then when you import data from other files and set them to import as the
same attribute, the software will compare the data in the new file to the items already in the
Selection List. If it finds new values it will automatically add the new values to the list and just link
to ones it finds that already exist. This is a very powerful tool for making sure the data you collect
and work with is consistent and convenient.
Notes on importing TIGER data:


When importing TIGER data the software automatically sets the commonly used attributes for
import and also classifies/groups the feature types into a more usable form, such as Roads,
Ponds, Streams, etc all get linked to a category by the software. If you want to see these
categories and display a legend, tooltip, etc for them then it is probably best if you import them
into the Management Tree. But if you only want to display the TIGER data as a visual reference
without a legend or being interactive then import the data as a Background.
There are two TIGER import formats that are supported. One is the *.RT1 file which contains all
the road, streams, lakes, etc detail data. The other file is the *.RT7 which only contains county
subdivision data. These two files must be imported separately if you want to see data from both
in your system.
How to batch import data (i.e. ESRI Shape,and text files). (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps for using the batch import feature:
Note: This feature can be used to import in batch many different file formats. The formats include, CSV
(.csv), Dbase (.dbf), Map Info (.mid/.mif), ESRI Shape (.shp) and Text (.txt) files. It is best to only batch
import one file format at a time.
1.
Go to the Tools Menu and select Batch Command Utility or select the Batch Command button from the Main
Toolbar.
2.
The Batch Command Utility should now be displayed. Select the Import Files option from the batch
command list and click the OK button.
3.
You should now see the Select Batch Import Files dialog. Now select one of two options for saving
management information when the files are being imported.


Don’t prompt for individual management settings – This option does not allow you to set the
management for each file. You set the management location to save the first imported file and
after that all others save to that location. If you have boundaries setup you can run a spatial sort
after the processing is complete if you want to sort the data into its proper location which can
sometimes be a faster process over setting the save location for each import file.
4.
Next select the Import File Format and then “Add” the files that are desired for importing to the list. If you
have a template you can select it and the template will be used for the attribute selection when you reach
that point in the import process. Once the files and/or template have been selected you can click the OK
button.
5.
You will now see the Select Import Type dialog. Select the appropriate Import Data Type for the data that
you are importing. If you want to Clip Imported Data to Field Boundaries then that option needs to be
selected below. Click the NEXT> button once you have made your selections.

134
Prompt for management settings for each file – This option will allow you to select the location you
want to save each file in the management tree. So at the start of processing each file you will be
prompted to set the location to save the imported data. If you have boundaries setup for your
fields you can use the “Auto-Select Grower/Farm/Field” button and it will auto-select the location in
the management tree by spatial location of the data.
Hint: If you are importing point data in batch you can select the Clip to Boundary option and it will
spatial sort your data on import. This would be a good option if you want to choose the Don’t
prompt for individual management settings option and let the spatial sorting auto-sort on
import.
6.
Next you are going to see the Select Column Attributes dialog. If you loaded a template in step 3 then the
columns should be filled out based on the template settings, note that you can also load a template at this
point if it was not loaded in step 3. If not you will need to define all attributes that you want to import for all
the files. Once setup you can save your template if desired then click the Next> button.
7.
Depending on your selection in step 2 this will vary, if you selected to prompt then you are going to be
prompted after each file is processed to enter the management. Note the file name is located in the title of
each management selection save dialog. If you selected to not prompt then you are going to be prompted
on the first file and after that it will save all the files in that location. After the processing is complete you are
done, you can now work with the files that you imported. You may want to rename the datasets if the name
is not what you desire, which will be the name of the import file by default.
How to ...
How to export an ESRI Shape file.
Follow these steps to export an ESRI Shape file from the software:
1.
Select the data in the Management Tree that you would like to export or select a layer in the active map.
2.
Go to the File menu and select Export. The Select an Export Method... dialog will now appear.
3.
Select the Export to a Generic File Format button and then click the Start...button.
4.
Now select the Generic format button and then the Shape format from the list. Depending on what data you
would like to export and what data is contained in the dataset/layer that is being exported select from the
available export options that are provided.
5.
If you would like to customize the formatting of the shape export click on the Export Settings button. You can
save and load export templates on the Export Settings dialog.
6.
Once you are ready to start the export, click the Export... button.
7.
Now select a location and name to save the shape files. Three files are created when saving a Shape file.
8.
Click Save and your files will be exported.
How to import an ASCII text file.
Follow these steps to import an ASCII text file into the system:
1.
Now go to the FILE menu or the main toolbar and select READ FILE(S)...
2.
A dialog will now appear with three options on it for reading files into the software. To import files from a
generic source, select the third option IMPORT A FILE FROM A GENERIC SOURCE. The option is selected
if there is a green check mark over the top right corner of the file icon. Once the option is selected, click the
START IMPORTING GENERIC FILES... button.
3.
A dialog will now appear that provides a list of the file formats or groups of formats that can be imported.
Select the button labeled as TEXT FILES. Then click the SELECT FILE(S) TO IMPORT... button.
4.
Now using the Open dialog, select the location and name of the text file to be imported and click Open.
5.
Make the following selections on the Select Text Format window:



Record Format
Number of Header Lines
Ignore Consecutive Delimiters.
Click OK when done.
7.
Make the following selections:


Data Type
Management Type
Then click Next>when done.
5.
Select attributes to be mapped, if desired. You can also select Save Template to save the columns settings
as a custom template for future use. Click Next> when done.
6.
Select the management information for the imported data then click Next>.
7.
Click Finish.
How to import non-spatial data (i.e. Soil Lab Results).
Follow these steps to import a non-spatial ASCII text file into the system, soil sampling lab results for example:
1.
Now go to the FILE menu or the main toolbar and select READ FILE(S)...
2.
A dialog will now appear with three options on it for reading files into the software. To import files from a generic
source, select the third option IMPORT A FILE FROM A GENERIC SOURCE. The option is selected if there is a
green check mark over the top right corner of the file icon. Once the option is selected, click the START
IMPORTING GENERIC FILES... button.
3.
A dialog will now appear that provides a list of the file formats or groups of formats that can be imported. Select
the button labeled as NON-SPATIAL FILES (LAB RESULTS). Then click the SELECT FILE(S) TO IMPORT...
button.
4.
Now using the Open File dialog, select the location and name of the text file to be imported and click Open.
5.
Make the following selections on the Select Text Format window:

Record Format

Number of Header Lines

Select Column Header Line
135
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual

Ignore Consecutive Delimiters option if needed.
4.
Click OK when done.
5.
Now select data filters to define what Fields from a selected Operation will be provided for possible assignment
to your import data. So if you are importing Soil Lab Results you would more than likely select the Soil Sampling
operation to limit the available fields for linking to your import file to ones that contain soil sampling points.
6.
Then click Next> when done.
7.
The Edit Data Filter Results dialog will now be displayed and provides a tree view of all the datasets that met
your filter selections on the previous dialog. You can remove any datasets that are listed that you do not want
their associated fields listed for on the next dialog. Click the FINISH button once you are satisfied with the
datasets listed.
8.
The Select Field Name Column dialog will now be displayed. Select the Field Names Not Available option if the
non-spatial import file does not contain a column with a field name or other management item that separates
results from different fields. Select Select Field Name Column if the non-spatial import file contains a column
that identifies field names for the data. Then pick a column header name that represents the field name. Click
NEXT> once you have made your selection.
9.
The Assign Import Data by Field Names dialog will not be displayed. This dialog provides a list of available fields
from the system based on the filters you set above and then a list of field names from the import file. You then
assign the field names from the system to their matching field name in the import file. Once you have assigned
all the fields you desire to import, click the FINISH button.
10. In order to link the data contained in the import file, i.e. lab results, to the data, i.e. soil sample points,
contained in the system, a reference attribute must be chosen to link an attribute in existing and import dataset.
This will help ensure that point one in the sample point dataset is properly matched with the first sample values
in the import file. Most often the Feature ID in the systems soil sampling dataset will be selected and matched
with an attribute in the import file such as Sample ID or Point Name. Click NEXT> once a reference attribute has
been selected.
11. You must now assign attributes to the attributes that you wanted imported into the system and used to fill in the
soil sampling attributes that are contained in your soil sampling dataset for example. Set the required reference
attribute that you selected in the previous step to an attribute in the import set that will be used to link entries in
the two datasets. Then assign the soil sampling attributes in the system to the columns in the import dataset that
correspond to these attributes and that you want stored and displayed.
12. Once you have setup the attribute columns for import you can save and import template that can be loaded the
next time you import lab results with identical formatting.
13. Click the FINISH button to link and import the lab results into your soil sampling dataset.
14. The imported results data can now be viewed by mapping the dataset they were linked to, on the summary, or in
and editor for the dataset.
How to export an ASCII text file.
Follow these steps to export an ASCII text file from the software:
1.
Select the data in the Management Tree, below the Field level, that you would like to export or select a layer
in the active map.
2.
Go to the File menu and select Export. The Select an Export Method... dialog will now appear.
3.
Select the Export to a Generic File Format button and then click the Start...button.
4.
Now select Comma or Tab delimited text formats from the list of available formats.
5.
If you would like to customize the formatting of the text export click on the Export Settings button. You can
save and load export templates on the Export Settings dialog. Once you are ready to continue, click the OK
button on the Export dialog.
6.
Depending on what data you would like to export and what data is contained in the dataset/layer that is
being exported select from the available export options that are provided.
7.
Select a location and name to save the text file.
8.
Click Save.
How to import data using a template.
Follow these steps to use an import template to import data into the system:
136
1.
Now go to the FILE menu or the main toolbar and select READ FILE(S)...
2.
A dialog will now appear with three options on it for reading files into the software. To import files from a
generic source, select the third option IMPORT A FILE FROM A GENERIC SOURCE. The option is
selected if there is a green check mark over the top right corner of the file icon. Once the option is
selected, click the START IMPORTING GENERIC FILES... button.
3.
A dialog will now appear that provides a list of the file formats or groups of formats that can be imported.
Select the radio button labeled as IMPORT A FILE USING A SAVED TEMPLATE. Now click the
How to ...
BROWSE... button and select one of the available import template files, which end in the extension *.imt.
Then click the SELECT FILE(S) TO IMPORT... button.
4.
An open dialog will now appear and you should now select the file that you would like to import using the
selected template. Click Open once you have made your selection. Note: The file selected for import must
match the format and type that was used to create the template.
5.
Select a Data Type and a Management Type for the imported data. The Data Type selection will depend
on the type of data being imported. If it is point data then you can import it as any of the types in the
system such as Grain Harvest or Application Rate. If the file contains data formatted as a polygon or
polyline then the type can only be Generic. For the Management Type, you can select to import the data
and manage/display it in the Management Tree or use it as a Background only, which means it will not be
selectable from the Management Tree. Click Next> once you make these selections. If you selected
Background, then the process is complete and you can now display the imported file as a background by
going to Set Background… and selecting the file.
6.
The Select Column Attributes dialog will now appear. The attribute columns should all be set and ready to
continue. Make sure that there is data for all the columns that are set and that they match properly. Click
Next> when done.
7.
Select the management information for the imported data then click Next>.
8.
Click Finish.
How to export a TGT prescription file.
Follow these steps to export a TGT prescription file:
1.
Select a prescription dataset from the Management Tree to create a TGT file from and highlight it or select a
gridded dataset layer on the active map.
2.
Go to the File menu and select Export. The Select an Export Method... dialog will now appear.
3.
Select either the option to export a full Device Setup or a single file for use in a field display and then click
the Start...button.
4.
If you selected the first option to export a Device Setup then please see the how to on creating/exporting a
Device Setup: How to create and export a Device Setup. If you selected the second option to export single
files to a display you will now be prompted to select the field display/format that you want to export to.
5.
Select the Ag Leader Technology file group button and then select the TGT Prescription selection from the
file format list. Click the Export... button.
6.
The TGT Export Settings dialog will now appear. If desired enter in different X and Y grid sizes than what
are displayed by default. The Field and Product names should be filled in based on the management
information for the selected dataset but these names can be edited since they have no effect on how the Ag
Leader PF3000 or PF3000 Pro will use them. Select a unit for the TGT file. Lastly, enter a default rate that
will be used in the case that you lose GPS or differential correction while applying or manually override the
prescription file.
7.
The export Preview dialog will now be displayed and show what your prescription dataset looks like now that
it has been converted to a raster type dataset so that it can be saved as a TGT. Click OK to continue on.
8.
Now select a location to save the TGT prescription file to. Ideally you would select your PC card drive and
have the export save the TGT prescription file directly to the PCMCIA card.
9.
Now enter a name to save the file as if you don’t like the default, which is the Field name.
10. Click the Save button.
How to export an Insight/EDGE/INTEGRA IRX Prescription File
Follow these steps to export an IRX prescription file:
1.
Select one or more (limit 5) prescription datasets from the Management Tree to create an IRX file from or
select a gridded dataset layer(s) on the active map.
2.
Go to the File menu and select Export. The Select an Export Method... dialog will now appear.
3.
Select either the option to export a full Device Setup or a single file for use in a field display and then click
the Start...button.
4.
If you selected the first option to export a Device Setup then please see the how to on creating/exporting a
Device Setup: How to create and export a Device Setup. If you selected the second option to export single
files to a display you will now be prompted to select the field display/format that you want to export to.
5.
Select the Ag Leader Technology file group button and then select one of the *.IRX selections from the file
format list. If you are only exporting a single prescription then select the one without "- Mulitple Layers"
behind it. If you are exporting multiple prescriptions together for application at the same time then select the
file format option with "- Mulitple layers" after its name. Click the Export... button.
6.
The IRX Export Options dialog will now appear. If desired, enter in different X and Y grid sizes than what are
displayed by default. Now enter a default rate that will be used in the case that you lose GPS or differential
correction while applying or manually override the prescription file.
137
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
7.
The export Preview dialog will now be displayed and show what your prescription dataset looks like now that
it has been converted to a raster type dataset so that it can be saved as an IRX. Click OK to continue.
8.
Now select a location to save the IRX prescription file to. Ideally you would select your PC card drive and
have the export save the IRX prescription file directly to the PCMCIA card.
9.
Now enter a name to save the file as if you don’t like the default, which is the Field name.
10. Click the Save button.
How to export a Case IH or New Holland Voyager PRD Prescription file.
Follow these steps to export a Voyager PRD prescription file:
1.
The first step is to make sure that you already have or can export a Voyager *.CNH Setup to your PCMCIA
card or drive. The Voyager prescription file(s) and folder must be placed inside the *.CNH folder for the
display to recognize and use them. So if you do not already have a *.CNH folder on your PCMCIA card
please go to the Device Setup Utility under the Tools Menu and export a Voyager Setup card.
2.
Now select a prescription dataset from the Management Tree to create a Voyager PRD file from and
highlight it or select a prescription dataset layer on the active map.
3.
Go to the File menu and select Export. The Select an Export Method... dialog will now appear.
4.
Select the Export Single File to a Field Display/Monitor button and then click the Start...button.
5.
Now select either Case IH or New Holland file group buttons and then the *.PRD file format option from the
list of available formats. Click the Export... button.
6.
The Voyager Prescription Settings dialog will now appear. The Prescription and Product names should be
filled in based on the management information for the selected dataset but these names can be edited. A
Prescription Name is required to create the export file, and will be displayed on the device to identify the
prescription file so make sure to name it something you can understand. Enter a default rate as well for
situations where the system might have to revert to use of a default rate versus rates from the prescription.
The Application Type should automatically default appropriately but check to make sure it is set to the
appropriate type for the prescription that you are exporting. Once all the required settings have been made,
click OK.
7.
The Export Preview dialog will now be displayed and show what your prescription dataset(s) looks like.
Some changes to the dataset may occur due to the complexity of the export dataset and the device
restrictions for prescription files. Click OK to continue on.
8.
The Browse For Folder dialog will now appear. Select the location of your *.CNH folder to save the Voyager
prescription file and folder it is stored in to. Remember that saving the Voyager PRD prescription file and the
folder that it is contained in (PRESC folder) to any location other than inside the *.CNH folder will mean that
the Universal Display Plus will not be able to find or use the prescription file(s). The PRD prescription file(s)
must be located inside the PRESC folder which then must be placed in the root of a *.CNH folder.
9.
Click OK to save the Voyager prescription file to the selected location.
How to export an Ag Leader Basic or Advanced format file.
Follow these steps to export an Ag Leader Basic or Advanced text file from the software:
1.
Select the data in the Management Tree that you would like to export. (Only harvest data can be exported in
the Basic or Advanced formats. Also, only data selections at or below the Product/Crop level can be
exported as one of the Ag Leader file types.)
2.
Go to the File menu and select Export. The Select an Export Method... dialog will now appear.
3.
Select the Export to a Generic File Format button and then click the Start...button.
4.
Now select Ag Leader Basic or Advanced. Click OK.
5.
Select a location and name to save the text file as.
6.
Click Save.
How to print a map of the current layer.
Follow these steps to print a map for each of the layers that are currently open in the active map:
138
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
2.
Go to the File menu and select Print or click the right mouse button and select the Print option from the
menu or click on the Print icon on the Main Toolbar.
3.
A print wizard dialog will now appear that shows all your map/layer printing options. Select the first option,
Print Current Layer(s), select an available layout to print from the right side of the dialog and then click the
Print... button at the bottom of the dialog.
4.
The Single Layer Layout window will now appear with a screen preview of the printout. By clicking on one of
the boxes in the layout and activating it, you can adjust the size and position of all the visible boxes. Double
click the left mouse button on a box to view properties for it or go to the Tools Menu and select Edit
Properties for the selected box.
How to ...
5.
Once all the desired changes have been made select one of the available print output types. Go to the File
Menu or the button at the bottom of the dialog to see your print output options.



6.
Print - This option when selected will print to your default printer. This option can also be used to
print to a custom PDF print driver.
Print to Image - This option will create an image file such as a BMP, JPEG, or TIFF
(uncompressed) file of your printout.
Print to PDF - This option will directly create a PDF file of your printout.
Click the Close button to close the layout window or click Print again to make another printout.
How to print a map of all layers.
Follow these steps to print a map for each of the layers that are currently open in the active map:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
2.
Go to the File menu and select Print or click the right mouse button and select the Print option from the
menu or click on the Print icon on the Main Toolbar.
3.
A print wizard dialog will now appear that shows all your map/layer printing options. Select the first option,
Print Current Layer(s), then select the second radio button to print each layer to its own page, then select an
available layout to print from the right side of the dialog and then click the Print... button at the bottom of the
dialog.
4.
The Single Layer Layout window will now appear with a screen preview of the printout. By clicking on one of
the boxes in the layout and activating it, you can adjust the size and position of all the visible boxes. Double
click the left mouse button on a box to view properties for it, or go to the Tools Menu and select Edit
Properties for the selected box.
5.
Once all the desired changes have been made select one of the available print output types. Go to the File
Menu or the button at the bottom of the dialog to see your print output options.



6.
Print - This option when selected will print to your default printer. This option can also be used to
print to a custom PDF print driver.
Print to Image - This option will create an image file such as a BMP, JPEG, or TIFF
(uncompressed) file of your printout.
Print to PDF - This option will directly create a PDF file of your printout.
Click the Close button to close the layout window or click Print again to make another printout.
How to print the current map.
Follow these steps to print a map of the active map:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree, creating several map layers.
2.
Go to the File menu and select Print or click the right mouse button and select the Print option from the
menu or click on the Print icon on the Main Toolbar.
3.
A print wizard dialog will now appear that shows all your map/layer printing options. Select the second
option, Print Current Map, select an available layout to print from the right side of the dialog and then click
the Print... button at the bottom of the dialog.

If you would like to change the formatting and base contents of this print layout type, click the Map
Printing Options... button and this will provide you with the available formatting options for the
printout.
4.
The Map layout window will now appear. Make any changes to the layout that you would like. See step 4 in
Printing a Map of the Current Layer. The legend page layouts are fixed and can not be edited.
5.
Once all the desired changes have been made select one of the available print output types. Go to the File
Menu or the button at the bottom of the dialog to see your print output options.



6.
Print - This option when selected will print to your default printer. This option can also be used to
print to a custom PDF print driver.
Print to Image - This option will create an image file such as a BMP, JPEG, or TIFF
(uncompressed) file of your printout.
Print to PDF - This option will directly create a PDF file of your printout.
Click the Close button to exit the Map Layout window.
How to print a custom map.
Follow these steps to create and print a custom map layout:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
139
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
2.
Go to the File menu and select Print or click the right mouse button and select the Print option from the
menu or click on the Print icon on the Main Toolbar.
3.
A print wizard dialog will now appear that shows all your map/layer printing options. Select the third option,
Print Custom Layout, select an available layout to print from the right side of the dialog and then click the
Print... button at the bottom of the dialog.
4.
The Custom Layout window will now appear and be blank or load with the selected layout depending on the
option you selected. If you chose to create a new layout then it is up to you to design your layout from
scratch or if you load an existing layout you can add to or modify the layout to meet your needs.
5.
Use the tools provided in the toolbar to add what items you would like to have in your custom printout.
Multiple pages can be added as well, similar to the printout generated by the Current Map printout except
that you control the layout.
6.
After all the items have been added and placed as you would like, click the Save the Current Print Layout
icon or select File and then Save Layout to save a copy of the layout that can be loaded or set as a default
for other printouts.
7.
Once all the desired changes have been made select one of the available print output types. Go to the File
Menu or the button at the bottom of the dialog to see your print output options.



8.
Print - This option when selected will print to your default printer. This option can also be used to
print to a custom PDF print driver.
Print to Image - This option will create an image file such as a BMP, JPEG, or TIFF
(uncompressed) file of your printout.
Print to PDF - This option will directly create a PDF file of your printout.
Click the Close button to exit the Custom Layout window.
How to print the Summary Window Information.
Follow these steps to print the current contents of the Summary Window:
1.
Select an item from the Management Tree,
2.
If the Summary Window is not visible to the right of the Management Tree select the Summary tab at the
bottom of the screen.
3.
Once the summary information is visible and the data that you would like to print a copy of is displayed, click
the Print icon on the Main Toolbar or go to the File menu and then select Print.
4.
Now select the printer to print to and make any printer settings changes that you would like to make and
then click OK.
5.
The summary information will now print out just like it was displayed on the screen.
How to print the Map Window summary information.
Follow these steps to print the current contents of the Map Window summary information:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
2.
Go to the Map menu and select Hide or Show Features. The Map Window will now split and show summary
information pertaining to the current map.
3.
Go to the File menu, select Print, then Map Summary. The Map summary includes only summary
information with GPS data that has had filtering and processing options applied to it.
4.
Now select the printer to print to, and make any printer setting changes that you would like to make and then
click OK.
5.
The summary information will now print just like it was displayed on the screen.
How to print the query results information.
Follow these steps to print the query results generated by map queries:
1.
Select and map data from the Management Tree.
2.
Select one of the Query modes and a selection tool from the Map Toolbar.
3.
Query the desired location(s) on the map.
4.
Go to the File menu, select Print and then Query Results.
5.
Now select the printer to print to, and make any printer setting changes that you would like to make and then
click OK.
6.
The query information will now print out just like it was displayed on the screen.
How to print a report.
Follow these steps to print a report:
140
How to ...
1.
Go to the File Menu and select New and then Report… or select the New Report icon from the Main
Toolbar. Another option is to output your report as an HTML formatted file for use on the Internet instead of
printing it to the printer. To do this go the File menu and select Save as HTML once your report is made.
2.
The Report Wizard dialog will now appear. Select the type of report that you would like to print and then click
the Next> Button. Choose from the following options:

Grower Report - Prints summary information for the selected Grower, Year(s), and Operation
Type.

Condensed Farm Report - Prints summary information for the selected Grower, Farm(s), Year(s),
and Operation Type.

Field Report - Prints summary information for the selected Grower, Farm(s), Field(s), Year(s),
Operation Type, Product/Crop(s), and Operational Instance(s).

Crop / Product Report - Prints summary information for the selected Crop / Product(s), Year(s),
and Operation.

Operator Report - Prints summary information for the selected Operator(s), Year(s), and
Operation.

Resource Usage Report - Prints summary information for a selected Grower(s), Farm(s), Year(s),
Product(s), and Operation.
3.
Use the filters on the next dialog to select the desired information to be printed on the report.
4.
The Report Options dialog should now appear. This dialog allows you to select specific attributes to display
on your report other than what defaults and even change their display names to meet your needs. You can
also select whether or not you would like each individual report to print on its own page. This is checked by
default and is recommended for best printing results. The option to print an image file in the upper right-hand
corner of the printout next to the report title such as a logo for your business or farm is also provided.. Click
the FINISH button to create your report.
5.
Your report will now be created as a Report Document that will be displayed in the main window of the
software. From this document you can go back in and adjust the data filters for the report and all the
settings that you made while setting up the report to run. You can also print the report or save it to an HTML
file (which can be imported directly into EXCEL for example).
How to create a custom report. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to create a custom report:
1.
Go to the File Menu, select New, and then Report or select the New Report button from the main toolbar.
2.
The Report Type Selection dialog will appear. This dialog displays the current report groups and reports that
are in your system and allows you to select a report to run, edit, delete or to create a new report.


3.
To create a new report click the Add New... button.
To create a new report that is based on an existing report that you want to modify and save a
unique version of, click the Add Copy... button.
The Name/Description dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you set various descriptive items related to
your new report.



The Report Group selection allows you to select or add a Report Group that will be used to
organize your new report. This is very useful in cases where you want to organize your reports by
a certain type, such as As-Applied related or a group for each customer of yours.
The Name entry allows you to enter a name that you can use to identify the report by.
The Description allows you to enter in various details to further identify and describe the new
report.
Click the NEXT> button once you are finished with the entries.
4.
The Select Major Filter Items dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to select the data filters that you
will be required to select when you run your report. Operation is always required and will be selected by
default. An example would be to select the Farm and Field management items to filter data going into your
report by Farm, Field, and Operation. This does not affect the formatting of your report, just the data that will
go into it. Click the NEXT> button when finished.
5.
The Select Fixed Column Filter Items dialog should now appear. This dialog allows you to select the
management items and properties to use to group the results by in the report. An example would be to set
Product Name and Load/Region Name as groups for the report so that you would have a column listing all
the products in the selected datasets for input into the report and then another column that listed all the
141
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Load/Regions per Product name in the first column. A dataset is always required for grouping purposes.
The actual data values would follow per these groups. Click the FINISH button when finished.
6.
The Custom Selections for Each Operation dialog will now be displayed. This dialog allows you to view and
set what the default attributes and settings are for each operation that a report can be generated for. Every
report you design can have its own unique settings for each operation, allowing you to highly customize
your reports as appropriate per operation. If you are making a specific report for a particular Operation then
you can ignore the settings for the other Operation and just set the Operations that matter for the particular
report. Click the Edit button to go to the Report Options dialog where you can select which attributes will be
included in the report, the logo to use, and the page break settings. Click OK once you've made your
desired Report Options. Then click the FINISH button once you have set all the Operations that you want.
7.
You will now return to the Report Type Selection dialog. Your new report will now be listed under the Report
Group that you selected. Select your report and click the NEXT> button to run it.
How to print a chart.
Follow these steps to print a chart:
1.
Go to the File Menu and select New and then Chart… or select the New Chart icon from the Main Toolbar.
2.
The Chart Wizard dialog will now appear. Select the type of chart that you would like to print and then click
the Next> Button. Choose from the following options:

Attribute Comparison Chart-Allows the selection of an attribute from a selected Operation to
chart against properties for that Operation.


Generic Chart-Allows the creation of a generic chart based on the user’s preferences.
Product Comparison Chart-Allows the selection of an attribute for a selected Product(s) to chart
against properties for the Product(s).
3.
Use the management item filters on the next dialog to select the desired information to be printed on the
chart. Click Next> once the filters have been set.
4.
A dialog will now appear that shows the results of the filter above in tree form. The results listed will be the
data that will be used to generate the chart. If data was returned by the filter that you do not want included in
the chart, select the branch that contains the unwanted data and click the Delete button to remove it from the
data that will charted. Click Next> to continue.
5.
Now the Chart Axes dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to select the type of chart to print (Bar, pie,
line, etc.) and to set the attributes or properties that will be assigned to the X and Y axes and a grouping
property for the X axis. Click Next> to continue once all the settings are made.
6.
Now the Chart/Axes/Data Label Options dialog should appear. This dialog allows you to set various display
options for the axe, legend, and the data labels that can be displayed. Once you have made your selections
click the NEXT> button.
7.
The Chart Options dialog should now appear. This dialog allows you to set various display formatting options
for the chart. You can enter a custom title, add a logo, etc. You can also save your current chart settings that
have been set so far as the defaults that will be used each time you print a chart of this type. You can also
rest to the original chart settings. Click the FINISH button to create your chart.
8.
Your chart will now be created as a Chart Document that will be displayed in the main window of the
software. From this document you can go back in and adjust the data filters for the chart and all the settings
that you made while setting up the chart to run. You can also print the chart or save it to an image.
How to create a custom chart. (ADVANCED)
Follow these steps to create a custom chart:
1.
Go to the File Menu, select New, and then Chart or select the New Chart button from the main toolbar.
2.
The Chart Type Selection dialog will appear. This dialog displays the current chart groups and charts that
are in your system and allows you to select a chart to run, edit, delete or to create a new chart.


3.
To create a new chart that is based on an existing report that you want to modify and save a
unique version of, click the Add Copy... button.
The Name/Description dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you set various descriptive items related to
your new chart.



142
To create a new chart click the Add New... button.
The Chart Group selection allows you to select or add a Chart Group that will be used to organize
your new chart. This is very useful in cases where you want to organize your charts by a certain
type, such as As-Applied related or a group for each customer of yours.
The Name entry allows you to enter a name that you can use to identify the chart by.
The Description allows you to enter in various details to further identify and describe the new
chart.
How to ...
Click the NEXT> button once you are finished with the entries.
4.
The Select Major Filter Items dialog will now appear. This dialog allows you to select the data filters that you
will be required to select when you run your chart. Operation is always required and will be selected by
default. An example would be to select the Farm and Field management items to filter data going into you
chart by Farm, Field, and Operation. This does not affect the formatting of your chart, just the data that will
go into it. Click the FINISH button when finished.
5.
The Custom Selections for Each Operation dialog will now be displayed. This dialog allows you to view and
set what the default chart type, axis settings, etc are for each operation that a chart can be generated for.
Every chart you design can have its own unique settings for each operation, allowing you to highly
customize your charts as appropriate per operation. If you are making a specific chart for a particular
Operation then you can ignore the settings for the other Operation and just set the Operations that matter
for the particular chart.


Click the Edit button to go to the Chart Axes dialog where you can select the chart type and
attribute selections for the axes will be used to generate your chart. Click the NEXT> button once
you have made the required selections.
The Chart Options dialog should be displayed now. This allows you to enter in a default chart title,
title color, logo, and whether to show a background grid on the chart for the selected Operation.
Click the FINISH button when you are done.
Then click the FINISH button once you have made settings for all the Operations that you want.
6.
You will now return to the Chart Type Selection dialog. Your new chart will now be listed under the Chart
Group that you selected. Select your chart and click the NEXT> button to run it.
How to create a backup of your systems data.
Follow these steps to create a backup of the data in the system:
1.
Start the software.
2.
Go to the Services menu and select Backup/Restore Project(s).
3.
The Backup/Restore Project Options dialog will now appear. Select the Backup Project Data Now option and
click OK.

4.
You will be prompted with a dialog that allows you to select one, multiple, or all projects to be backed up.
Each project, even if multiple or all are selected, will be placed into its own backup file. Click OK once you
have made your selection and filled in the required text info.

5.
Advanced users can also select the option to Schedule a Backup for Your Project Data that will
automatically create backups at a scheduled data and time when you aren't running the software.
You also must enter in a custom description to help identify the backup file(s) from each other.
This is useful if you do regular or many backups and want to organize groups of backups by your
own naming scheme along with the current date. The custom folder name entry is required.
The software will now optimize and compress your data directories into one or more backups files, one per
project. When complete click OK.
How to restore a data backup file.
Follow these steps to create a backup of the data in the system:
1.
Start the software.
2.
Go to the Services menu and select Backup/Restore Project(s).
3.
The Backup/Restore project Options dialog will now appear. Select the Restore Project Data option and click
OK.
4.
You will now be prompted to select a directory to restore a backup file(s) from. You do not need to select the
file itself, just select the drive or directory where the file is stored. Click OK after selecting the location where
the file(s) is stored. If multiple backup files have been saved to the same location, then a dialog will appear
with a list of backup files, labeled by the date that they were created, their Group /Project name, and wether
they need migration. When you select a backup file from the list of available ones to restore, various
stats/info on the backup file will be provided for review. Select one, multiple, or all the listed backups and
click OK to start the restore process. You can also select backups from other storage locations; you aren't
restricted to the initial search location you picked.
Note: Basic users can only restore up to five projects.
Note: If you have created new import templates, legends, or print layouts since the last
backup, you will lose these files if you perform a restore from a backup file that was created
before the new files. Copy any files that you wish to keep to another location if you plan to use
them after the restore.
4.
The software will now start restoring the data from the backup file. When complete, click OK.
143
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
How to export and import Transfer Information
Exporting Transfer Information
Follow these steps for using the export transfer utilities feature:
1.
Under the Services menu select the Transfer Utilities ,then Export Settings and Files.
2.
You should now see the Select Information to Export dialog. This dialog allows you to export various items
and settings for the listed groups. Select the desired settings and files that you want to transfer and then
add them to the Selected Items to Export list. Once you have the list ready, click the Export button and
name the export file and save it.
3.
The export file containing all the selected information has now been created and can now be taken to
another install of the same version of the software and imported.
Importing Transfer Information
Follow these steps for using the import transfer utilities feature:
1.
Under the Services menu select the Transfer Utilities, then Import Settings and Files.
2.
You should now see the Select Information to Import dialog. In this feature you have ability to select items to
import and use in your program. By default all settings and files in the exported file are selected, so if some
setting or files are not desired to import you will have to remove them manually. The next setting you have
to choose is the if you want to “Create New Items if Duplicates Exist” or “Replace Duplicate Items with
Import Item”. These settings will allow you to create all new or replace system settings or files if conflicts
exist between the files you are importing and what already exists in your system. In most cases you will
create new but the option is there to replace if needed. Next you will need to click the Import button to
complete the process.
3.
The import process should not take very long, but if backgrounds are being import the process could be
slower depending on the image sizes. After the import process is complete you should have the ability to
use any of the settings or files that were imported.
NOTE: On both the Transfer Import and Export dialogs there is a button provided called "Set As Project
Transfer Default". Once you have made your selections for transfer import or export, click this button to
create a global transfer file that all the projects in your system can use. When you open a project it will
automatically check to see if it has the latest transfer file, if not it will ask you if you want to load the transfer
or not. This option is a very easy way to keep all your projects updated with the settings and items that you
want to commonly use.
144
Troubleshooting
Mapping Problems
Problem:
You read data into the system that should contain GPS data, but when you select to map it there are no points at all or
only a small number of the points appear.
Solution:

Solution 1 - The data was logged with the area count switch off, so the monitor was not recording
area. To fix this problem, select the data in the Management Tree at the Crop/Product level, then click
the right mouse button and select Reprocess Data… Now select the GPS Settings tab and select the
option to include points where area counting is off. Click the OK button and repeat for each file that
has data for the selected dataset. When finished, select the dataset in the Management Tree again
and make a new map. The data should now be visible.

Solution 2 - The file may not have had a "copy to card" performed before it was removed from the
monitor. Take the card back to the monitor, insert it, select the file in question as the current log file
under the Card Setup selection and then perform a Copy to Card. Now read the file again and your
data should appear when selected in the Management Tree and mapped. If it will not read the file in,
alter the name of the file slightly (i.e. 2000091301a.yld) and then try to read it into the system.
Problem:
The Smart Rectangle display for a map layer is blank when selected, while all the other map types work correctly.
Solution:
More than likely the data was logged without a speed sensor set in the monitor. Without the speed input a distance can
not be logged in the YLD, which is required to make Smart Rectangles. To fix the problem, select the dataset from the
Management Tree at the Product/Crop or Operational Instance, click the right mouse button, and then select
Reprocess Data from the menu that appears. The reprocess dialog will now appear for the first file that contains data
for the selected dataset. Click on the GPS Settings tab, un-select Correct/Discard GPS Flyers, select Use GPS Speed,
and then click the OK button. If more than one file contains data for the selected dataset, repeat the previous steps for
each file. Re-map the data and select Smart Rectangles as the display type, the map should now appear.
Printing Problems
Problem:
The software crashes or your printer provides an error while trying to print.
Solution:

Solution 1 - Go to the Control Panel and select Printers. Now select your printer in the window and
then go to the File menu and select Properties… Select the Details tab and click on the Spool
Settings button. Set Print Directly to the Printer and change the Spool Data Format to RAW. Click OK.
Finally, click Apply. Try to print now.

Solution 2 - Check with the manufacturer of your printer to see if there is a newer printer driver for
your model of printer and operating system, and install it.

Solution 3 - Another possible option to try is adding more memory to your system, since printing is a
memory intensive process.
If none of these solutions work, call Technical Support.
Problem:
Print layouts don’t have borders around the items on the layout after I upgraded from v1.0 to v1.1.
Solution:
The border setting in version 1.0 was set to "0" which should have meant there was not a border around items in the
layout. In version 1.1 we fixed this problem so that "0" means no border, but unfortunately since this is a user setting
we can’t automatically reset this value in a layout. You must go to the File Menu, select Print, and then Custom Layout.
Then open an existing layout that you would like to turn the borders back on for, and then double click on each item in
the layout and set the border to "1" or higher to get a visible border. Once all the borders have been turned back on,
Save the layout. The next time you print with the edited layout the borders will be visible.
145
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Restore Problems
Problem:
You try to restore a backup of your data and get a Restore Failed message at the end of the restore process.
Solution:
Close the software. Make sure that you do not have any of the directories that the software uses open in Explorer or
their own window. Now restart the software, go to the Services Menu and select Restore (It is important that you not
open any other menus or perform any other functions in the system other than going directly to the Restore feature).
Select the directory where the file is located and click OK. The restore should now start and complete properly. If the
process still fails please contact Technical Support.
Tutorial Problems
Problem:
When you start the Tutorial and select one of the video icons you get an error.
Solution:
You likely do not have the correct multimedia tools installed on your computer. To fix this problem, start by inserting
your Window’s Operating System CD into your CD-ROM drive. Then click on the Start button in the lower left hand
corner of the screen and select Settings and Control Panel. Once the Control Panel appears, double-click on the
Add/Remove Programs icon. The Add/Remove Programs dialog will now appear. Select the Setup tab (this varies in
name between Operating Systems) and you will see a list of components that you have installed. Scroll through the list
until you see Multimedia and make sure that it is checked. If it is checked then double-click on it and find the Video
Compression entry. Make sure it is checked (WinNT does not have this option.) Click OK to return to the main select
area and click Apply. The new components should now be installed. Reboot when done and then restart the Tutorial
and you should now be able to view the videos on the CD.
146
Reference Information
Glossary of Terminology
The following is a listing of terminology used in the software and the definitions for that terminology:
Attribute
Attributes are defined as frequently changing data and are used to convey actual values, logged or entered, for an
operation. So yield data that is logged continuously and is varying from logged value to logged value, would be an
attribute for example.
Property
Properties are defined as infrequently changing data used to define other management and data items. Names for
Farms, Fields, and Loads are examples of predefined properties within the system. An example would be to create a
property called Tillage Type and then add this property to any Load/Region that you wanted to track different tillage
types that were used for that load/region, the point being that the Tillage Type is not varying per logged sample for an
operation but instead applies to all logged data in the selected load/region.
Dataset
The base level of data in the system, represented as a Load or Region. All data read into the system is stored in some
form of a dataset.
Kriging
An interpolation method for generating unknown values from known ones by developing and applying a weighted
moving average. Weighting factors are arrived at through a semi-variogram.
Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)
An interpolation method that averages local cell values but also takes into account distance of neighboring cells. The
farther away sample data is from a location the less influence that data has on the calculation of a value at that
location. IDW is very useful for dense datasets such a yield data because of how fast the data can be processed and
the fact that large amounts of consistently spaced data exist.
Correlation
Used to describe the observed relationship between instances of two items. A systematic pattern can be seen in the
occurrences of events that are correlated. When the events involve numbers, a positive correlation means that as one
increases, the other increases as well. A negative correlation means that as one increases, the other decreases.
Correlation does not imply a cause in any way. In other words, just because two items are correlated does not mean
that one causes another, or has anything to do with the other - correlations deal only with observed instances of items,
and any further conclusions cannot be inferred from correlation alone. Strong correlation, however, does often warrant
further investigation to determine the cause of the relationship.
Spatial
Any item that refers to or describes a space, such as a farm or a field. Most spatial data contains position data that
links it to s specific spatial location, such as a yield point.
Semi-Variogram
A plot of the variance of a dataset and/or a theoretical model versus the distance. A semi-variogram is used to show
the correlation of data over a distance and its relation to a theoretical model that can be applied to the data during an
interpolation process such as Kriging.
Intersection
The area or length that two or more objects have in common, thus overlapping each other in some fashion.
Intersection can be used to only select areas or lengths that overlap each other or it can be used divide objects into
new objects based on the common areas or lengths.
Normalize Data
Process of reassigning the values in a dataset to a fixed or common scale. Normalizing datasets allows for the
comparison of results across different data value ranges, such as when trying to compare corn and soybean yields in a
field.
Raster Data
A data format that stores data in grid cells in row and column formatting. Images are an example of raster data. Raster
datasets can allow for faster access to the data contained in each cell, such as when running queries and selecting
data on a map.
Vector Data
147
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
A data format that stores and displays data as lines rather than grid cells. Vector data displays lines, polygons, etc in
an almost continuous form, providing more appealing presentation on maps and more accurate spatial operations.
Frozen boundaries, polylines, and polygons are examples of vector data.
Interpolation
A process of predicting unknown values at locations between known data points. Many different interpolation methods
exist, but the software utilizes the Inverse Distance Weighted and Kriging methods. Interpolation is a critical process
for datasets that are very sparse, such as soil sampling results, yet cover a large area.
Grid Map
A map created by converting an area to rows and columns of rectangular grids that cover the data area. The values
created for each cell are interpolated in most cases. Grid mapping is very useful soil sampling and prescription
datasets.
Contour Map
A map created using an interpolation method that represents the data as smoothed regions bounded by lines. The
closer the spacing of the lines the more frequently the data values are changing across the area being mapped.
Contour maps are very useful for better visualizing data trends and simplifying dense or sparse datasets.
Logical Value (Boolean)
A logical data type that always produces one of two possible value results, such as YES/NO or TRUE/FALSE. An
example would value for Area Count, which would either be On or Off.
Selection List (Enumerated)
A list of data values that have been assigned unique ID’s. This allows the selection of data values from a fixed list of
selections thus ensuring consistent value selection. An example would be Soil Texture and the enumerated list of
values that can be selected from.
Discrete
A unique whole number or string value. An example would be a seeding rate of 45,000 seeds/ac.
Unique Decimal Number (Discrete Float)
A value that is discrete (non-continuous) but does contain a decimal place of precision. An example might be a soil pH
value of 7.6 or a rainfall gauge reading of 10.25 mm.
Decimal Number (Float)
A value that contains decimal places of precision and is not discrete (non-continuous) in nature. An example would be
a yield value of 145.45 bu/ac.
Text (String)
A combination of symbols, characters, or numbers that are treated as a whole and not as a numerical format. An
example would be a Field or Load Name.
Integer
A positive or negative whole number such as 1, -1, etc. or 0. An example would be a Load ID or Marks Count value.
Epoch
A period of time marked by an event. An example would be the creation of a new calibration for a harvest season.
GPS Coordinate Conversions
The system only accepts import files that have Latitude and Longitude formatted in the Degrees Decimal format. This
is the same format that the YM2000, PF3000, and PF3000 Pro log GPS data.
The following examples and equations will assist in any conversions that may need to be applied to the data that will
be imported.
Convert Degrees, minutes, seconds (43 02’ 32") to Degrees, decimal degrees:
1. Divide 32" by 60 = .5333
2. Then Add .5333 to 02’ = 2.5333
3. Now divide 2.5333 by 60 = .04222
4. Finally, add 43 to .04222 = 43.04222
148
Reference Information
The final value in Degrees, decimal degrees is 43.04222.
Convert Degrees, minutes, fractional minutes (-89 22.80003’) to Degrees, decimal degrees:
1. Divide 22.800003 by 60 = .38000
2. Now add –89 to .38000 = -89.38000
The final value in Degrees, decimal degrees is –89.38000.
Ag Leader Basic and Advanced format
Ag Leader Basic and Advanced data formats can be used to export to systems that support direct importing of these
formats. These formats were developed for transfer of yield data from Ag Leader’s Yield Monitor 2000. As such they
do not support the functionality of the latest hardware very well. It is recommended that you use one of the general
export formats such as text or shape.
149
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Export Data Formats
The software allows you to export data in a number of formats. Some of the selections such as ESRI Shape or ASCII
text are formatted based on the data type being exported and the information that is stored in the database. All data
that is exported generically is exported with a column heading for each variable as well as a unit for the attribute. When
exporting data use these column headings to decide how to process the data or import it into another program. The
export formatting can be adjusted and saved or loaded.
150
Reference Information
SDTS to DEM Converter (ADVANCED)
The United States Geological Survey (USGS) produces digitally-encoded terrain data in the form of regular grids called
"digital elevation models", or DEM files. Several different file formats have been used for this data, culminating in the
incredibly complex Spatial Data Transfer Standard, or SDTS.
The adoption of SDTS was a giant step backwards. While previous DEM files could be read by relatively simple
programs, SDTS file are difficult to read even with the help of a large external programming library. A conversion tool
was developed by individuals in the private sector for use/distribution in the public domain that converts SDTS data
back to the old DEM format for easier integration into other applications. The program is called SDTS2DEM.exe and is
provided on the software CD for your use in converting to standard DEM files, which the software provides a standard
import for under the File Menu, Import, and Spatial File. DEM's can be used in the software to replace the 3D grid that
is used in the 3D Terrain View to provide higher accuracy and continuity than the grid generated by your log data may
provide.
How to Use the Converter Program
Follow these step to convert a SDTS file set to a DEM file:
1.
Find the location of your SDTS DEM data that you have downloaded or purchased. SDTS data is almost
always zipped using the .TAR.GZ zip format and a common file would have a name like
1628494.DEM.SDTS.TAR.GZ. Unzip this file to a location on your computer. The folder it creates when it
unzips will contain a number of *.DDF files which define the SDTS DEM data.
NOTE: If you unpack your file using WinZip, be sure that the "TAR file smart CR/LF conversion"
box is NOT checked on the Options/Configuration/Miscellaneous screen. Also make sure to
unzip each file into its own folder, do not unzip them all into one location because some files
may overwrite each other.
2.
Now go to the software CD, and the MISC folder, and then the OTHER folder below that. Copy the
sdts2dem.exe program.
3.
Now paste the copied program into each folder(s) that you have SDTS DEM files with the *.DDF extension.
4.
Double-click on the sdts2dem.exe program to start it and follow its directions to complete the conversion.
5.
Once completed you will end up with a single DEM file that you can now import into the software.
151
Index
3
Booklet.................................................................. 49, 79
3D Mapping................................................................. 62
Booklet Document Window ........................................ 49
3D Plot ................................................................ 41, 105
Booklet Printing .......................................................... 79
create .................................................................... 105
Boundary .................................................. 100, 105, 106
3D Plot Window .......................................................... 41
create .................................................................... 105
3D Terrain View .......................................................... 97
edit ........................................................................ 106
display ..................................................................... 97
A
freeze .................................................................... 100
C
About Document Windows.......................................... 33
Calendar Summary Document Window ..................... 43
About Jobs .................................................................. 73
Calendar View ...................................................... 29, 96
Add...................................................... 97, 102, 113, 115
Using....................................................................... 96
Layer ....................................................................... 97
Case IH..................................................................... 140
property ................................................................. 102
export .................................................................... 140
simple analysis function ........................................ 115
Chart................................................................... 46, 144
Add Buffer Regions................................................... 113
print ....................................................................... 144
object..................................................................... 113
Chart Document Window............................................ 46
Adjust layer ................................................................. 98
Cluster analysis dataset ........................................... 119
ADVANCED18, 29, 31, 41, 43, 47, 49, 62, 76, 78, 79, 96, 97, 101, 104,
105, 107, 108, 113, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 124,
generate................................................................
119125, 126, 127, 136, 143, 1
Advanced format............................................... 140, 151
Create67, 73, 100, 101, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111, 113, 114, 115, 130, 143, 14
Advanced format file ................................................. 140
3D Plot .................................................................. 105
Ag Leader Basic................................................ 140, 151
backup .................................................................. 145
export .................................................................... 140
boundary ............................................................... 105
All layers ................................................................... 141
crop plan ............................................................... 106
Analysis Document Window ....................................... 47
custom chart ......................................................... 144
Analysis equation...................................................... 122
custom report ........................................................ 143
write....................................................................... 122
Data ........................................................................ 67
Analysis Menu............................................................. 18
generic dataset ..................................................... 107
Analysis Wizard .......................................................... 76
guidance dataset................................................... 108
ASCII text file .................................................... 137, 138
Job ........................................................................ 130
export .................................................................... 138
new attribute ......................................................... 100
import .................................................................... 137
new property ......................................................... 100
Associated dataset.................................................... 114
soil......................................................................... 111
edit......................................................................... 114
variable rate prescription....................................... 109
Attribute....................................................................... 98
Create associated data............................................. 114
Average Data ............................................................ 107
Create navigation points........................................... 109
use......................................................................... 107
Create spatial notes.................................................. 113
B
Create split planter data ........................................... 115
Back ............................................................................ 89
Creation ...................................................................... 75
Backup ...................................................................... 145
Crop.................................................................. 106, 107
create .................................................................... 145
Crop plan .......................................................... 106, 107
Batch comparison analysis ....................................... 121
create .................................................................... 106
run ......................................................................... 121
edit ........................................................................ 107
Batch import data...................................................... 136
Current layer............................................................. 140
Bitmap....................................................................... 134
Current map.............................................................. 141
export .................................................................... 134
print ....................................................................... 141
153
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Custom chart............................................................. 144
Edit spatial notes ...................................................... 114
create .................................................................... 144
Editing Jobs ................................................................ 73
Custom map.............................................................. 141
Enter Financial Tracking entries ............................... 103
print ....................................................................... 141
ESRI Shape.............................................. 135, 136, 137
Custom Operation..................................................... 101
import .................................................................... 135
edit......................................................................... 101
ESRI Shape file ........................................................ 137
Custom report ........................................................... 143
export .................................................................... 137
create .................................................................... 143
Export ... 73, 82, 131, 134, 137, 138, 139, 140, 146, 152
D
Ag Leader Basic.................................................... 140
Data ...... 55, 57, 61, 62, 67, 70, 75, 81, 82, 93, 112, 145
ASCII text file ........................................................ 138
Creating................................................................... 67
bitmap ................................................................... 134
Editing ..................................................................... 70
Case IH ................................................................. 140
Exporting ................................................................. 82
Data ........................................................................ 82
Importing ................................................................. 81
ESRI Shape file..................................................... 137
Mapping................................................................... 61
Insight IRX Prescription File.................................. 139
Processing............................................................... 55
Job .................................................................. 73, 131
Data backup file ........................................................ 145
TGT prescription file.............................................. 139
restore ................................................................... 145
Export Data Formats ................................................ 152
Data Management ...................................................... 57
F
Data Modification ........................................................ 75
Farm ......................................................................... 130
Data Playback............................................................. 62
manually move...................................................... 130
Database Maintenance ............................................... 92
Field.......................................................................... 131
Dataset.............................................................. 102, 111
manually move...................................................... 131
Define Products ........................................................ 101
Financial Entries Tree................................................. 31
DEM Converter ......................................................... 153
Financial Tracking ...................................................... 79
SDTS..................................................................... 153
Financial Tracking report .......................................... 104
Device Setup............................................................... 84
generate................................................................ 104
Display ........................................................................ 97
Freeze ...................................................................... 100
3D Terrain View....................................................... 97
Download .................................................................. 129
Download imagery .................................................... 129
E
boundary ............................................................... 100
G
General Layout ........................................................... 22
Generate........... 104, 118, 119, 120, 124, 125, 126, 127
Edit13, 70, 73, 99, 101, 103, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 112, 113, 114,cluster
117 analysis dataset......................................... 119
associated dataset ................................................ 114
Financial Tracking report ...................................... 104
boundary ............................................................... 106
Multi ...................................................................... 124
crop plan................................................................ 107
NDVI dataset......................................................... 126
custom Operation .................................................. 101
Profit...................................................................... 125
Data......................................................................... 70
terrain analysis dataset ......................................... 127
image..................................................................... 113
Generate comparison results ................................... 120
legend...................................................................... 99
Generate correlation results ..................................... 118
prescription dataset ............................................... 110
Generic dataset ........................................................ 107
simple analysis function ........................................ 117
create .................................................................... 107
Edit generic data ....................................................... 108
Georeference............................................................ 128
Edit Menu.................................................................... 13
Image .................................................................... 128
Edit navigation points................................................ 109
Getting .......................................................................... 4
Edit point data ............................................................. 99
Started ...................................................................... 4
Edit property data...................................................... 103
Glossary ................................................................... 149
Edit soil ..................................................................... 112
Terminology .......................................................... 149
Edit soil sampling data .............................................. 112
GPS Coordintes Conversions................................... 150
154
Index
Guidance dataset...................................................... 108
Using....................................................................... 95
create .................................................................... 108
Manually move ......................................... 130, 131, 132
H
Help Menu................................................................... 22
Farm...................................................................... 130
Field ...................................................................... 131
Manually move other management items ................ 132
I
Image ........................................................ 113, 128, 134
Map16, 36, 40, 61, 62, 94, 96, 97, 130, 140, 141, 142, 147
edit......................................................................... 113
Data ........................................................................ 61
georeference ......................................................... 128
make ....................................................................... 96
Image file .................................................................. 134
print ............................................................... 140, 141
import .................................................................... 134
Problems............................................................... 147
Import............................ 81, 94, 134, 135, 137, 138, 146
Map background................................................. 61, 130
ASCII text file......................................................... 137
set ......................................................................... 130
Data......................................................................... 81
Map Menu................................................................... 16
ESRI Shape........................................................... 135
Map projection ............................................................ 94
image file ............................................................... 134
Map Properties ........................................................... 40
Import data.......................................................... 81, 138
Map Window....................................................... 36, 142
Import Greenstar data................................................. 94
Map Window summary information .......................... 142
Import non................................................................. 137
print ....................................................................... 142
Import Transfer Information ...................................... 146
MapInfo Mid.............................................................. 135
Insight IRX Prescription File...................................... 139
Merge cotton pickings............................................... 118
export .................................................................... 139
Merged cotton dataset.............................................. 118
Instant Yield Map Software ......................................... 93
update ................................................................... 118
Internet...................................................................... 129
Mif............................................................................. 135
Introduction ................................................................... 1
Migrate........................................................................ 93
J
Multi .......................................................................... 124
Job ........................................................ 28, 73, 130, 131
generate................................................................ 124
create .................................................................... 130
Multi-Project Analysis ................................................. 78
export .............................................................. 73, 131
Job/Task Summary Document Window...................... 45
K
Know ............................................................................. 1
Things You Need....................................................... 1
L
N
NDVI dataset ............................................................ 126
generate................................................................ 126
New attribute ............................................................ 100
create .................................................................... 100
New Holland ............................................................. 140
Layer ......................................................... 51, 62, 97, 98
New Holland Voyager PRD Prescription file ............ 140
Add .......................................................................... 97
New property ............................................................ 100
Layer Window ....................................................... 51, 98
Using ....................................................................... 98
Legends ................................................................ 65, 99
create .................................................................... 100
O
Object ....................................................................... 113
edit........................................................................... 99
add Buffer Regions ............................................... 113
Link Items.................................................................... 50
Open......................................................................... 128
Linked Item Document Window .................................. 50
workspace............................................................. 128
Loss dataset.............................................................. 125
Other image file type ................................................ 134
M
Main Menu Selections................................................... 7
P
Pass.................................................................... 99, 118
Make ........................................................................... 96
straighten ........................................................ 99, 118
map ......................................................................... 96
Plotting........................................................................ 62
Management ................................................. 23, 95, 102
Point dataset....................................................... 99, 118
Management Items ................................................... 102
Polygon Tool............................................................. 107
Management Tree................................................. 23, 95
Precision Map 2000.................................................... 93
155
SMS Basic and Advanced Manual
Prescription dataset .................................................. 110
Restoring Data............................................................ 89
edit......................................................................... 110
Run ....................................................................... 1, 121
Preview ................................................................. 32, 95
batch comparison analysis.................................... 121
Preview Window ................................................... 32, 95
Software.................................................................... 1
Using ....................................................................... 95
Print............................... 79, 87, 140, 141, 142, 144, 147
S
Save ......................................................................... 128
chart ...................................................................... 144
workspace............................................................. 128
current map ........................................................... 141
SDTS ........................................................................ 153
custom map........................................................... 141
DEM Converter ..................................................... 153
map ............................................................... 140, 141
Search ...................................................................... 127
Map Window summary information ....................... 142
spatial data............................................................ 127
Problems ............................................................... 147
Services Menu............................................................ 20
query results information ....................................... 142
Set ...................................................................... 94, 130
report ..................................................................... 142
map background ................................................... 130
Summary Window Information .............................. 142
Setup Files.................................................................. 89
Problems................................................................... 147
Simple analysis function ................................... 115, 117
Mapping................................................................. 147
add ........................................................................ 115
Printing .................................................................. 147
edit ........................................................................ 117
Processing .................................................................. 55
remove .................................................................. 117
Data......................................................................... 55
Single........................................................................ 133
Profit.......................................................................... 125
Single layer............................................................... 133
generate ................................................................ 125
query ..................................................................... 133
Projects ....................................................................... 58
Software ....................................................................... 1
Properties............................................................ 98, 102
Run ........................................................................... 1
add ........................................................................ 102
Soil.................................................................... 111, 137
Property Options ......................................................... 98
Q
create .................................................................... 111
Soil Lab Results........................................................ 137
Query ........................................................ 133, 134, 142
Soil sampling dataset ............................................... 111
single layer ............................................................ 133
Sort ........................................................................... 133
Query multiple layers ................................................ 134
Spatial data................................................. 78, 127, 137
Query results information.......................................... 142
search ................................................................... 127
print ....................................................................... 142
Spatial Data Finder............................................. 78, 127
R
Spatially sort Fields into Farms ................................ 132
Read ........................................................................... 93
Spatially sort Loads .................................................. 133
Read logged data files into ......................................... 93
Split........................................................................... 133
system ..................................................................... 93
Started .......................................................................... 4
Region....................................................................... 133
Getting ...................................................................... 4
Regions into Fields ................................................... 133
Straighten ........................................................... 99, 118
Registering.................................................................... 4
pass ................................................................ 99, 118
Your Software............................................................ 4
Summary ............................................................ 33, 142
Remove..................................................................... 117
Summary Window .............................................. 33, 142
simple analysis function ........................................ 117
Summary Window Information ................................. 142
Report ................................................................. 44, 142
print ....................................................................... 142
print ....................................................................... 142
Sync............................................................................ 55
Report Document Window .......................................... 44
With SMS Mobile .................................................... 55
Reprocess data........................................................... 94
System............................................................ 1, 93, 145
Restore ............................................................. 145, 148
read logged data files into....................................... 93
data backup file ..................................................... 145
System Requirements .................................................. 1
Restore Problems ..................................................... 148
Systems data............................................................ 145
156
Index
T
Using .............................................. 95, 96, 98, 127, 138
Task Tree.................................................................... 28
Calendar View......................................................... 96
Tasks ............................................................ 28, 73, 130
Layer Window ......................................................... 98
Template ................................................................... 138
Management Tree................................................... 95
Terminology .............................................................. 149
Glossary ................................................................ 149
Preview Window ..................................................... 95
V
Terrain analysis dataset............................................ 127
Variable rate prescription.......................................... 109
generate ................................................................ 127
create .................................................................... 109
TGT prescription file.................................................. 139
Vector Overlay Tool.................................................. 108
export .................................................................... 139
use ........................................................................ 108
Things You Need .......................................................... 1
View Menu.................................................................. 15
Know ......................................................................... 1
W
TIGER file ................................................................. 135
With SMS Mobile ........................................................ 55
Tools Menu ................................................................. 19
Syncing ................................................................... 55
Transfer Settings......................................................... 89
Workspaces........................................................ 57, 128
Tutorial Problems...................................................... 148
open ...................................................................... 128
U
Update ...................................................................... 118
merged cotton dataset........................................... 118
Use................................................................ 6, 107, 108
save ...................................................................... 128
Write ......................................................................... 122
analysis equation .................................................. 122
Y
Average Data ........................................................ 107
Year averages dataset ............................................. 124
Vector Overlay Tool............................................... 108
Your Software............................................................... 4
Use Electronic Help ...................................................... 6
Registering................................................................ 4
157
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising